RAN 11.

0

Signalling Analysis Guide

Issue Date

01 2009-03-25

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. For any assistance, please contact our local office or company headquarters.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com

Website: Email:

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2009. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are the property of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but the statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

RAN Signalling Analysis Guide

Contents

Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................1 1 Cell Setup Procedure.................................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Protocols Related to Cell Setup.......................................................................................................................1-2 1.2 Triggering Conditions of Cell Setup...............................................................................................................1-2 1.3 Signaling Procedure of Successful Cell Setup................................................................................................1-2 1.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Cell Setup Procedure................................................................................1-3 1.5 Elementary Procedures of Cell Setup..............................................................................................................1-6 1.5.1 Resource Status Indication Procedure....................................................................................................1-6 1.5.2 Resource Audit Procedure......................................................................................................................1-7 1.5.3 Cell Setup Procedure..............................................................................................................................1-8 1.5.4 Common Transport Channel Setup Procedure.......................................................................................1-9 1.5.5 Iub User Plane Setup Procedure...........................................................................................................1-10 1.5.6 System Information Update Procedure................................................................................................1-11 1.5.7 Physical Shared Channel Reconfiguration Procedure..........................................................................1-12 1.5.8 Common Measurement Initiation Procedure.......................................................................................1-13

2 Cell Reconfiguration Procedure..............................................................................................2-1
2.1 Protocols Related to Cell Reconfiguration......................................................................................................2-2 2.2 Triggering Conditions of Cell Reconfiguration..............................................................................................2-2 2.3 Signaling Procedure of Cell Reconfiguration.................................................................................................2-2 2.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Cell Reconfiguration Procedure...............................................................2-3

3 Cell Deletion Procedure............................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Protocols Related to Cell Deletion..................................................................................................................3-2 3.2 Triggering Conditions of Cell Deletion..........................................................................................................3-2 3.3 Signaling Procedure of Cell Deletion..............................................................................................................3-2 3.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Cell Deletion Procedure...........................................................................3-3

4 Location Update Procedure......................................................................................................4-1
4.1 Protocols Related to Location Update.............................................................................................................4-2 4.2 Triggering Conditions of Location Update.....................................................................................................4-2 4.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Location Update...................................................................................4-2 4.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Location Update Procedure......................................................................4-3 4.5 Elementary Procedures of Location Update....................................................................................................4-6 4.5.1 RRC Connection Setup Procedure.........................................................................................................4-6 Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i

Contents

RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 4.5.2 Location Update Procedure....................................................................................................................4-9 4.5.3 Iu Release Procedure............................................................................................................................4-10 4.5.4 RRC Connection Release Procedure....................................................................................................4-11

5 Outgoing Call Procedure..........................................................................................................5-1
5.1 Protocols Related to an Outgoing Call............................................................................................................5-2 5.2 Triggering Conditions of an Outgoing Call....................................................................................................5-2 5.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Outgoing Call.......................................................................................5-2 5.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Outgoing Call Procedure..........................................................................5-4 5.5 Elementary Procedures of an Outgoing Call...................................................................................................5-7 5.5.1 RRC Connection Setup Procedure.........................................................................................................5-8 5.5.2 Signaling Connection Setup Procedure (Outgoing Call).....................................................................5-11 5.5.3 Authentication and Security Mode Control Procedure........................................................................5-12 5.5.4 Call Setup Procedure (Outgoing Call).................................................................................................5-13 5.5.5 RAB Setup Procedure..........................................................................................................................5-15 5.5.6 Call Release Procedure (Outgoing Call)..............................................................................................5-16 5.5.7 RRC Connection Release Procedure....................................................................................................5-17

6 Incoming Call Procedure..........................................................................................................6-1
6.1 Protocols Related to an Incoming Call............................................................................................................6-2 6.2 Triggering Conditions of an Incoming Call....................................................................................................6-2 6.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Incoming Call.......................................................................................6-2 6.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Incoming Call Procedure..........................................................................6-4 6.5 Elementary Procedures of an Incoming Call...................................................................................................6-7 6.5.1 Paging Procedure....................................................................................................................................6-8 6.5.2 RRC Connection Setup Procedure.........................................................................................................6-9 6.5.3 Signaling Connection Setup Procedure (Incoming Call).....................................................................6-12 6.5.4 Authentication and Security Mode Control Procedure........................................................................6-13 6.5.5 Call Setup Procedure (Incoming Call).................................................................................................6-14 6.5.6 RAB Setup Procedure..........................................................................................................................6-16 6.5.7 Call Release Procedure (Incoming Call)..............................................................................................6-17 6.5.8 RRC Connection Release Procedure....................................................................................................6-19

7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure....................................................................................7-1
7.1 Types of Intra-Frequency Handover...............................................................................................................7-2 7.2 Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Within a NodeB............................................................................................7-2 7.2.1 Protocols Related to Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Within a NodeB.................................................7-3 7.2.2 Triggering Conditions of Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Within a NodeB..........................................7-3 7.2.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Within a NodeB........................7-3 7.2.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Within a NodeB......7-4 7.2.5 Elementary Procedures of Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Within a NodeB........................................7-5 7.3 Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC........................................................................7-8 7.3.1 Protocols Related to Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC.............................7-9 7.3.2 Triggering Conditions of Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC......................7-9 ii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

RAN Signalling Analysis Guide

Contents

7.3.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC .........................................................................................................................................................................7-9 7.3.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC...............................................................................................................................................................7-10 7.3.5 Elementary Procedures of Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC..................7-12 7.4 Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between RNCs...........................................................................................7-17 7.4.1 Protocols Related to Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between RNCs.................................................7-18 7.4.2 Triggering Conditions of Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between RNCs.........................................7-18 7.4.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between RNCs.......................7-18 7.4.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between RNCs.....7-19 7.4.5 Elementary Procedures of Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between RNCs.......................................7-22 7.5 Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC....................................................................7-29 7.5.1 Protocols Related to Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC..........................7-30 7.5.2 Triggering Conditions of Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC..................7-30 7.5.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC .......................................................................................................................................................................7-30 7.5.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC...............................................................................................................................................................7-31 7.5.5 Elementary Procedures of Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC.................7-33 7.6 Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between RNCs..........................................................................................7-38 7.6.1 Protocols Related to Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between RNCs...............................................7-39 7.6.2 Triggering Conditions of Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between RNCs........................................7-39 7.6.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between RNCs......................7-39 7.6.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between RNCs....7-40 7.6.5 Elementary Procedures of Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between RNCs......................................7-43

8 Inter-Frequency Handover Procedure....................................................................................8-1
8.1 Types of Inter-Frequency Handover...............................................................................................................8-2 8.2 Inter-Frequency Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC...............................................................................8-2 8.2.1 Protocols Related to Inter-Frequency Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC.....................................8-3 8.2.2 Triggering Conditions of Inter-Frequency Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC.............................8-3 8.2.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Inter-Frequency Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC............8-3 8.2.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Inter-Frequency Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC .........................................................................................................................................................................8-4 8.2.5 Elementary Procedures of Inter-Frequency Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC............................8-6 8.3 Inter-Frequency Handover Between RNCs...................................................................................................8-12 8.3.1 Protocols Related to Inter-Frequency Handover Between RNCs........................................................8-13 8.3.2 Triggering Conditions of Inter-Frequency Handover Between RNCs.................................................8-13 8.3.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Inter-Frequency Handover Between RNCs...............................8-13 8.3.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Inter-Frequency Handover Between RNCs.............8-14 8.3.5 Elementary Procedures of Inter-Frequency Handover Between RNCs...............................................8-16

9 Inter-RAT Handover Procedure..............................................................................................9-1
9.1 Types of Inter-RAT Handover........................................................................................................................9-2 9.2 Inter-RAT CS Handover from WCDMA to GSM..........................................................................................9-2 Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii

...................... Issue 01 (2009-03-25) .....................................................................................................5..2..............2 Static Relocation...4................3..................5 Elementary Procedures of Static Relocation..............................................................................2.............................................2 Triggering Conditions of Relocation with Hard Handover..............................10-26 10.................10-25 10......................4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Relocation with Hard Handover.........................5 Elementary Procedures of Relocation with Hard Handover..................................... Ltd..9-2 9...................4..................9-26 10 SRNS Relocation Procedure..............................................................................................10-13 10....................5 Elementary Procedures of Inter-RAT CS Handover from GSM to WCDMA................................................3...................................................9-9 9.............10-26 10.............10-26 10................9-20 9.................3...........................................................................................10-3 10............9-19 9...........................5 Elementary Procedures of Inter-RAT CS Handover from WCDMA to GSM.........................3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Relocation with Hard Handover.......................................2 Triggering Conditions of Static Relocation............10-30 10..................Contents RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 9..........................4...............................................9-21 9........4 Inter-RAT PS Handover from WCDMA to GSM.......................5 Elementary Procedures of Inter-RAT PS Handover from WCDMA to GSM..4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Inter-RAT CS Handover from WCDMA to GSM ............................................2..........1 Types of SRNS Relocation.9-13 9.......3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Relocation with Cell/URA Update..................................2 Triggering Conditions of Inter-RAT CS Handover from WCDMA to GSM...........................2.1 Protocols Related to Relocation with Cell/URA Update...........................10-13 10......................2......................................................................................................4.....3....4..1 Protocols Related to Inter-RAT PS Handover from WCDMA to GSM.........................2...9-19 9..5 DSCR Procedure.............................3............................10-36 10.....................................................................................9-3 9.5 Inter-RAT PS Handover from GSM to WCDMA..2........10-2 10.............3.............................9-22 9....2.......3...9-9 9...................................10-3 10.....1 Protocols Related to Static Relocation.......................................10-6 10....................10-17 10.............4. 9-9 9.....................................................10-27 10..............10-2 10...............................................................3.......................3..............10-3 10.....................................................10-15 10...3......10-1 10..............................................................................2...........................................4... 9-3 9.............9-5 9.........4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Static Relocation Procedure.............4.....................................................................1 Protocols Related to Inter-RAT CS Handover from WCDMA to GSM..........................4...........................................5 Elementary Procedures of Relocation with Cell/URA Update..............................3 Inter-RAT CS Handover from GSM to WCDMA........4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Relocation with Cell/URA Update........................1 Protocols Related to the DSCR Procedure......3 Signaling Procedure of Successful Inter-RAT PS Handover from WCDMA to GSM................................2 Triggering Conditions of Inter-RAT PS Handover from WCDMA to GSM........................................................3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Static Relocation..................................................................2 Triggering Conditions of Relocation with Cell/URA Update.....................................................9-8 9.....................1 Protocols Related to Inter-RAT CS Handover from GSM to WCDMA...................................................................9-4 9...................................2.......................................................10-2 10.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Inter-RAT CS Handover from GSM to WCDMA .3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Inter-RAT CS Handover from GSM to WCDMA...........................10-13 10........................................................9-11 9........9-19 9..........................4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Inter-RAT PS Handover from WCDMA to GSM .......2 Triggering Conditions of Inter-RAT CS Handover from GSM to WCDMA..............3 Relocation with Cell/URA Update..................................................10-36 iv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co....................................10-12 10...................1 Protocols Related to Relocation with Hard Handover...............3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Inter-RAT CS Handover from WCDMA to GSM.4 Relocation with Hard Handover......................4.....

......................3 Signaling Procedure of Successful Positioning Based on A-GPS............................2 Triggering Conditions of Positioning Based on CELLID+RTT............RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Contents 10.....................2 Positioning Based on CELLID+RTT...............................................................................4.4..........2..................................11-3 11.......11-1 11.............................11-13 11...........................5...........................................................2 Cause of Triggering the DSCR Procedure....................3................................................. Ltd....2......................................................2 Triggering Conditions of Positioning Based on OTDOA-IPDL.................................................11-2 11...4...........3...................................11-2 11......................................................1 Protocols Related to Positioning Based on CELLID+RTT.......3 Positioning Based on OTDOA-IPDL..............................................................................................................................11-8 11................................................................4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Positioning Based on CELLID+RTT or OTDOA-IPDL ...3.......................................3............................3 Successful DSCR Procedure........11-12 11...............................................2......11-12 11...................................11-3 11.....................11-8 11...................3.....................................11-12 11.....................................................4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Positioning Based on CELLID+RTT or OTDOA-IPDL .....2 Triggering Conditions of Positioning Based on A-GPS....10-37 10.....4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Positioning Based on A-GPS..............4 Positioning Based on A-GPS........................4..................................4.........................11-7 11....5.......................................11-5 11......1 Positioning Methods...........................1 Protocols Related to Positioning Based on A-GPS........11-2 11.11-13 11........................................1 Protocols Related to Positioning Based on OTDOA-IPDL.....................................................11-7 11.........3 Signaling Procedure of Successful Positioning Based on CELLID+RTT......2..................5 Elementary Procedures of Positioning Based on OTDOA-IPDL...........11-14 Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..11-10 11..........................................................................................10-37 11 Location Service Procedure............................................................................................................5 Elementary Procedures of Positioning Based on A-GPS........................................................... v ...................................................11-8 11..........11-3 11.......................2...........3 Signaling Procedure of Successful Positioning Based on OTDOA-IPDL.....................5 Elementary Procedures of Positioning Based on CELLID+RTT.................................

.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ Ltd........1-8 Figure 1-6 Cell setup procedure....................................................................................................................................4-12 Figure 4-11 RRC connection release procedure (from a CCH)..................1-11 Figure 1-9 System information update procedure........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Figures Figures Figure 1-1 Signaling procedure of successful cell setup................................................................................................................................................................................................................ vii ........................4-3 Figure 4-2 Example of Uu signaling tracing result....................................................................................................................................................................1-7 Figure 1-5 Resource audit procedure........2-2 Figure 2-2 Example of Iub signaling tracing result.........................................5-6 Figure 5-3 Example of Iub signaling tracing result..................................................................................................................4-5 Figure 4-3 Example of Iub signaling tracing result........1-12 Figure 1-10 Physical shared channel reconfiguration procedure........................................................................................................................4-7 Figure 4-6 RRC connection setup procedure on a CCH................................1-5 Figure 1-4 Resource status indication procedure......................................................................3-2 Figure 3-2 Example of Iub signaling tracing result......4-5 Figure 4-5 RRC connection setup procedure on a DCH..........................................1-10 Figure 1-8 Iub user plane setup procedure..........................................................................................................5-9 Figure 5-6 RRC connection setup procedure on a CCH..............................................................................................................................4-10 Figure 4-10 RRC connection release procedure (from a DCH).................................................1-13 Figure 1-11 Common measurement initiation procedure....................................4-5 Figure 4-4 Example of Iu signaling tracing result...................................................................5-3 Figure 5-2 Example of Uu signaling tracing result...................5-7 Figure 5-4 Example of Iu signaling tracing result........................4-9 Figure 4-9 Iu release procedure.......................................................................................................................2-3 Figure 3-1 Cell deletion procedure...............................................................................................................5-7 Figure 5-5 RRC connection setup procedure on a DCH...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................1-14 Figure 2-1 Cell reconfiguration procedure............................4-13 Figure 5-1 Signaling procedure of a successful outgoing call...........................................................................................................................................................................4-8 Figure 4-8 Location update procedure.........................4-8 Figure 4-7 RRC connection rejected procedure.........................................1-3 Figure 1-2 Example of Iub signaling tracing result....................................................................1-5 Figure 1-3 Example of Q.............3-3 Figure 4-1 Signaling procedure of a successful location update.....................................................................AAL2 protocol tracing result................................5-10 Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co...................................1-9 Figure 1-7 Common transport channel setup procedure..........................5-10 Figure 5-7 RRC connection rejected procedure........

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................7-14 Figure 7-13 Radio link restoration procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover)................................................6-6 Figure 6-3 Example of Iub signaling tracing result......6-11 Figure 6-10 Signaling connection setup procedure..................5-18 Figure 5-15 RRC connection release procedure (from a CCH).................................................................7-17 Figure 7-17 Signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency soft handover between RNCs..............................................................5-14 Figure 5-11 Successful RAB setup procedure..............................7-3 Figure 7-2 Example of Uu signaling tracing result............................................................ Ltd...6-16 Figure 6-14 Unsuccessful RAB setup procedure...........................................6-8 Figure 6-6 Paging procedure (for a UE that is in CELL_DCH or CELL_FACH state)........5-19 Figure 6-1 Signaling procedure of a successful incoming call......................................................................................5-12 Figure 5-10 Call setup procedure (outgoing call).7-4 Figure 7-3 Example of Iub signaling tracing result...............................................................................................Figures RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Figure 5-8 Signaling connection setup procedure.......................................................7-12 Figure 7-11 Radio link setup procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover).........................................................................................................................................................................................6-7 Figure 6-5 Paging procedure (for a UE that is in idle mode or in PCH state).......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................7-10 Figure 7-8 Example of Uu signaling tracing result.....................5-11 Figure 5-9 Authentication and security mode control procedure.........................................7-8 Figure 7-7 Signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency soft handover between NodeBs in an RNC ......................................................................................5-16 Figure 5-13 Call release procedure (outgoing call).........................................................................................................................................7-15 Figure 7-14 Active set update procedure....................6-12 Figure 6-11 Authentication and security mode control procedure.........6-20 Figure 7-1 Signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency soft handover within a NodeB......7-13 Figure 7-12 Iub user plane setup procedure.........................7-6 Figure 7-5 Active set update procedure.........................................................7-7 Figure 7-6 Radio link deletion procedure....................................................................................................6-17 Figure 6-15 Call release procedure (incoming call).....................................................................................6-19 Figure 6-17 RRC connection release procedure (from a CCH).................................7-11 Figure 7-9 Example of Iub signaling tracing result.................................................................................................................................................................................AAL2 signaling tracing result.......................................6-18 Figure 6-16 RRC connection release procedure (from a DCH).............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................6-11 Figure 6-9 RRC connection rejected procedure..................................................................................................................7-16 Figure 7-16 Iub user plane release procedure......................7-19 viii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..5-15 Figure 5-12 Unsuccessful RAB setup procedure........6-3 Figure 6-2 Example of Uu signaling tracing result............................................................................... Issue 01 (2009-03-25) ........7-11 Figure 7-10 Example of Q.........................................................................................................................................................5-17 Figure 5-14 RRC connection release procedure (from a DCH).........................................................................................................................7-15 Figure 7-15 Radio link deletion procedure......................................................................................................................................................................................6-15 Figure 6-13 Successful RAB setup procedure.....6-10 Figure 6-8 RRC connection setup procedure on a CCH..............................................................................6-7 Figure 6-4 Example of Iu signaling tracing result.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................7-5 Figure 7-4 Radio link addition procedure.........................................6-13 Figure 6-12 Call setup procedure (incoming call).................................................................................................6-9 Figure 6-7 RRC connection setup procedure on a DCH............................

..............................7-48 Figure 7-53 Iub user plane release procedure.......................................................................................................8-6 Figure 8-5 Radio link addition procedure..........................7-29 Figure 7-31 Signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency hard handover between NodeBs in an RNC . 8-7 Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co...........7-46 Figure 7-51 Physical channel reconfiguration procedure..........................7-28 Figure 7-30 Iur user plane release procedure.................7-32 Figure 7-34 Example of Q.....................................................7-41 Figure 7-43 Example of Iub signaling tracing result (source RNC).................. Ltd.............................................................................................7-37 Figure 7-40 Iub user plane release procedure...........................................................................................................................................8-5 Figure 8-3 Example of Iub signaling tracing result..................................................................................................................................................................7-40 Figure 7-42 Example of Uu signaling tracing result...........7-31 Figure 7-32 Example of Uu signaling tracing result.................................................8-4 Figure 8-2 Example of Uu signaling tracing result..................................................................................................................................................................................................7-23 Figure 7-24 Iub user plane setup procedure.............................................................................AAL2 signaling tracing result....................................AAL2 signaling tracing result.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................7-45 Figure 7-50 Iur user plane setup procedure...........................................................................7-36 Figure 7-39 Radio link deletion procedure...............7-42 Figure 7-47 Radio link setup procedure (inter-RNC handover)........................................................................................................7-44 Figure 7-48 Iub user plane setup procedure.................................................................................7-34 Figure 7-36 Iub user plane setup procedure......................................7-21 Figure 7-20 Example of Iub signaling tracing result (target RNC)....................................................................7-35 Figure 7-37 Radio link restoration procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover).........................................................................................7-47 Figure 7-52 Radio link deletion procedure.............................................................................................................7-38 Figure 7-41 Signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency hard handover between RNCs............................AAL2 signaling tracing result..................................................7-24 Figure 7-25 Radio link restoration procedure (inter-RNC handover)..........................................................................................................7-24 Figure 7-26 Iur user plane setup procedure...................................................7-21 Figure 7-22 Example of Q................................................................................................................................................................................AAL2 signaling tracing result.........................................................7-21 Figure 7-23 Radio link setup procedure (inter-RNC handover).....................................................7-50 Figure 8-1 Signaling procedure of a successful inter-frequency handover between NodeBs in an RNC...............................................7-49 Figure 7-54 Iur user plane release procedure.............7-25 Figure 7-27 Active set update procedure..........................................7-36 Figure 7-38 Physical channel reconfiguration procedure...7-33 Figure 7-35 Radio link setup procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover)............................................................8-5 Figure 8-4 Example of Q..........................................................................................................................................RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Figures Figure 7-18 Example of Uu signaling tracing result.....................................................................7-21 Figure 7-21 Example of Iur signaling tracing result...............................................7-20 Figure 7-19 Example of Iub signaling tracing result (source RNC)...........................................................................................................................................................................................7-45 Figure 7-49 Radio link restoration procedure (inter-RNC handover)...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................7-32 Figure 7-33 Example of Iub signaling tracing result.............................................7-42 Figure 7-44 Example of Iub signaling tracing result (target RNC)...............................................................................7-27 Figure 7-29 Iub user plane release procedure.........................................................................................7-26 Figure 7-28 Radio link deletion procedure......... ix ...........................................................................7-42 Figure 7-46 Example of Q..7-42 Figure 7-45 Example of Iur signaling tracing result.......

.....................................................................................................8-17 Figure 8-19 Iub user plane setup procedure................................................AAL2 signaling tracing result..............................................................................................................................................................8-19 Figure 8-21 Iur user plane setup procedure..................................8-15 Figure 8-14 Example of Iub signaling tracing result (source RNC)..............9-18 Figure 9-18 Signaling procedure of a successful inter-RAT PS handover from WCDMA to GSM.........................................................................................................................................................................................................9-16 Figure 9-15 UE capability enquiry procedure..........................................................................................9-22 Figure 9-21 Example of Iu signaling tracing result....9-5 Figure 9-5 Relocation preparation procedure............................8-10 Figure 8-9 Physical channel reconfiguration procedure............................................9-20 Figure 9-19 Example of Uu signaling tracing result...............................Figures RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Figure 8-6 Radio link setup procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover)....................................................9-15 Figure 9-14 Radio link restoration procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover).................................................................................. Ltd......9-4 Figure 9-3 Example of Iub signaling tracing result......................................................................................................................................9-22 Figure 9-22 Cell change order from UTRAN procedure...................................9-12 Figure 9-11 Example of Iu signaling tracing result...........................................................................................................9-10 Figure 9-9 Example of Uu signaling tracing result......................................................................8-24 Figure 9-1 Signaling procedure of a successful inter-RAT CS handover from WCDMA to GSM..................8-11 Figure 8-11 Iub user plane release procedure..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................8-18 Figure 8-20 Radio link restoration procedure (inter-RNC handover).........................................................................................................................................................................................9-5 Figure 9-4 Example of Iu signaling tracing result..............8-8 Figure 8-7 Iub user plane setup procedure...........................................................................................8-16 Figure 8-16 Example of Iur signaling tracing result......8-20 Figure 8-22 Physical channel reconfiguration procedure..............9-14 Figure 9-13 Radio link setup procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover).................................8-14 Figure 8-13 Example of Uu signaling tracing result...........................................................................8-16 Figure 8-17 Example of Q.............9-16 Figure 9-16 Security mode control procedure.............................................................................................................9-12 Figure 9-10 Example of Iub signaling tracing result..............................................................................................9-12 Figure 9-12 Relocation resource allocation procedure.......9-8 Figure 9-8 Signaling procedure of a successful inter-RAT CS handover from GSM to WCDMA................................................8-22 Figure 8-24 Iub user plane release procedure.............................8-10 Figure 8-10 Radio link deletion procedure................................................................................................................................................9-22 Figure 9-20 Example of Iub signaling tracing result...........................................................................................................................8-21 Figure 8-23 Radio link deletion procedure.......................................................................8-16 Figure 8-18 Radio link setup procedure (inter-RNC handover)....................................................9-17 Figure 9-17 UTRAN mobility information procedure.....................................................8-16 Figure 8-15 Example of Iub signaling tracing result (target RNC).....................................................................................9-6 Figure 9-6 Iu release procedure.............................................................................9-3 Figure 9-2 Example of Uu signaling tracing result.......9-7 Figure 9-7 Radio link deletion procedure....................8-23 Figure 8-25 Iur user plane release procedure..8-9 Figure 8-8 Radio link restoration procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover)....................... Issue 01 (2009-03-25) ................................................9-23 x Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co............8-12 Figure 8-12 Signaling procedure of a successful inter-frequency handover between RNCs...........................................................................

.......10-29 Figure 10-30 Example of Iu signaling tracing on the DRNC.................................10-31 Figure 10-32 Relocation resource allocation procedure.............................................................................................10-37 Figure 11-1 Signaling procedure of successful positioning based on CELLID+RTT...................10-9 Figure 10-10 UTRAN mobility information procedure..................................................................................................................................10-29 Figure 10-29 Example of Iu signaling tracing on the SRNC.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................10-25 Figure 10-26 Signaling procedure of a successful relocation with hard handover.....................................................10-35 Figure 10-36 Iu release procedure...............10-6 Figure 10-7 Relocation preparation procedure...................................................................................................................................................................9-25 Figure 9-25 Radio link deletion procedure..............................................................10-17 Figure 10-17 Example of Iu signaling tracing on the SRNC..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................10-22 Figure 10-23 Relocation commit procedure (static relocation or relocation with cell/URA update).........10-17 Figure 10-19 Relocation preparation procedure.........................................................10-5 Figure 10-4 Example of Iur signaling tracing on the DRNC..........................................................................10-16 Figure 10-15 Example of Iur signaling tracing on the SRNC.....................................................................................................................................................................10-12 Figure 10-13 Signaling procedure of a successful relocation with cell/URA update..........................................10-6 Figure 10-6 Example of Iu signaling tracing on the DRNC.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................10-21 Figure 10-22 URA update procedure...............................10-19 Figure 10-20 Relocation resource allocation procedure...........11-4 Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..................................................................10-20 Figure 10-21 Cell update procedure......................................................................... xi ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................10-36 Figure 10-37 Successful DSCR procedure........................................10-17 Figure 10-16 Example of Iur signaling tracing on the DRNC..................................RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Figures Figure 9-23 SRNS context transfer procedure..............................................................10-5 Figure 10-3 Example of Iur signaling tracing on the SRNC.....10-3 Figure 10-2 Example of Uu signaling tracing result......................9-26 Figure 10-1 Signaling procedure of a successful static relocation.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................10-8 Figure 10-9 Relocation commit procedure (static relocation or relocation with cell/URA update).............................................................10-29 Figure 10-28 Example of Uu signaling tracing on the DRNC........................................................10-27 Figure 10-27 Example of Uu signaling tracing on the SRNC................................................................................................................................10-30 Figure 10-31 Relocation preparation procedure.................10-33 Figure 10-34 Physical channel reconfiguration procedure...10-34 Figure 10-35 UE capability enquiry procedure.........................................11-3 Figure 11-2 Example of CDT tracing result.10-5 Figure 10-5 Example of Iu signaling tracing on the SRNC............................ Ltd...........................................................................................................................9-24 Figure 9-24 Iu release procedure.............10-24 Figure 10-25 Iu release procedure................................................................................................................................................10-11 Figure 10-12 Iu release procedure...................................................................10-7 Figure 10-8 Relocation resource allocation procedure.....10-14 Figure 10-14 Example of Uu signaling tracing for the relocation with cell update..............................10-10 Figure 10-11 UE capability enquiry procedure.......................................10-17 Figure 10-18 Example of Iu signaling tracing on the DRNC.......................................10-23 Figure 10-24 UE capability enquiry procedure.............10-32 Figure 10-33 Relocation commit procedure (relocation with hard handover)........................

..... Issue 01 (2009-03-25) ......................................................................................................................................................................................11-14 Figure 11-11 UE measurement procedure....................................................................................................................................................11-5 Figure 11-4 RTT measurement procedure..............Figures RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Figure 11-3 UE measurement procedure.....................11-13 Figure 11-10 Example of CDT tracing result............................................................................... Ltd....................................................................................................................................11-8 Figure 11-6 Example of CDT tracing result............................................11-15 xii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..................................................................................11-6 Figure 11-5 Signaling procedure of successful positioning based on OTDOA-IPDL.................11-11 Figure 11-9 Signaling procedure of successful positioning based on A-GPS.........................................11-9 Figure 11-7 UE measurement procedure.....11-10 Figure 11-8 RTT measurement procedure..................................................

......................................................................................10-28 Table 11-1 Messages to be traced...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................1-4 Table 2-1 Messages to be traced................................................11-14 Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.......................................8-5 Table 8-3 Messages to be traced...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................7-32 Table 7-6 Messages to be traced.................................11-4 Table 11-2 Messages to be traced.................................................................................................................................................................................8-15 Table 9-1 Messages to be traced................................................10-15 Table 10-4 Messages to be traced on the DRNC..........................7-11 Table 7-4 Messages to be traced..........................................3-3 Table 4-1 Messages to be traced...........................................................................................................................7-20 Table 7-5 Messages to be traced.................................................................................................RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Tables Tables Table 1-1 Triggering conditions of cell setup................4-4 Table 5-1 Messages to be traced...................................................................................................................................................................................................9-11 Table 9-3 Messages to be traced...................................................................................................................................................................5-4 Table 6-1 Messages to be traced........................................10-15 Table 10-5 Messages to be traced on the SRNC........10-4 Table 10-2 Messages to be traced on the DRNC........................................................................................7-41 Table 8-1 Types of inter-frequency handover..........................................................8-2 Table 8-2 Messages to be traced.......6-4 Table 7-1 Types of intra-frequency handover.....9-21 Table 10-1 Messages to be traced on the SRNC..........................11-9 Table 11-3 Messages to be traced.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................7-4 Table 7-3 Messages to be traced.....................................................................................................7-2 Table 7-2 Messages to be traced..................................2-3 Table 3-1 Messages to be traced...........................................9-4 Table 9-2 Messages to be traced...............................1-2 Table 1-2 Messages to be traced.........................................................................................................................................................................................10-28 Table 10-6 Messages to be traced on the DRNC.10-4 Table 10-3 Messages to be traced on the SRNC................................................................................................ Ltd......................................................... xiii ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

.

and signaling tracing on the RNC LMT. and signaling in normal and abnormal conditions. and signaling tracing on the RNC LMT. triggering conditions. signaling procedure. This topic also describes the elementary procedures in terms of functions..RAN Signalling Analysis Guide About This Document About This Document Purpose This document describes the triggering conditions of common signaling procedures. Version The following table lists the product versions related to this document. Ltd. triggering conditions. and presents the ways of signaling tracing on the LMT. 1 . Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. This topic describes the cell reconfiguration procedure in terms of protocols. 2 Cell Reconfiguration Procedure The cell reconfiguration procedure is performed to reconfigure a cell in the NodeB. explains the procedures in normal and abnormal conditions. Product Name RNC Version V100R011 V200R011 NodeB V100R011 V200R011 Intended Audience This document is intended for: l l Field engineers System engineers Organization 1 Cell Setup Procedure The cell setup procedure is performed to set up a WCDMA cell. This topic describes cell setup in terms of protocols. signaling procedure of successful cell setup. triggering conditions.

and signaling in normal and abnormal conditions. and signaling tracing on the RNC LMT. triggering conditions. This topic also describes the elementary procedures in terms of functions. signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency handover. triggering conditions. and signaling in abnormal conditions. signaling procedure of a successful inter-RAT handover. and signaling in normal and abnormal conditions. and signaling in normal and abnormal conditions. triggering conditions.. This chapter also describes the elementary procedures in terms of functions. This topic describes intra-frequency handover in terms of types. triggering conditions. protocols. and signaling tracing on the RNC LMT. procedure. 6 Incoming Call Procedure In the incoming call procedure. and elementary procedures. signaling procedure. This topic describes outgoing call setup and release in terms of protocols. This topic also describes the elementary procedures in terms of functions. triggering conditions. triggering conditions.About This Document RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 3 Cell Deletion Procedure The cell deletion procedure is performed to delete a cell from the NodeB. Routing area update is initiated by the UE to inform the PS service domain of the core network that the UE has entered a new routing area. 9 Inter-RAT Handover Procedure The inter-RAT handover procedure is performed to hand over a UE from a WCDMA cell to a GSM cell or the other way round. triggering conditions. This topic describes inter-frequency handover in terms of types. triggering conditions. triggering conditions. signaling procedure of successful location update. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . 4 Location Update Procedure Location area update is initiated by the UE to inform the CS service domain of the core network that the UE has entered a new location area. and signaling tracing on the RNC LMT. 7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure The intra-frequency handover procedure is performed to hand over a UE from the WCDMA cell that it camps on to an intra-frequency WCDMA cell. protocols. and signaling tracing on the RNC LMT. triggering conditions. and signaling tracing on the RNC LMT. 8 Inter-Frequency Handover Procedure The inter-frequency handover procedure is performed to hand over a UE from the WCDMA cell that it camps on to an inter-frequency WCDMA cell. signaling tracing on the RNC LMT. the network calls a UE and the UE responds to the paging. triggering conditions. and signaling tracing on the RNC LMT. triggering conditions. Ltd. signaling procedure of a successful incoming call. This topic describes inter-RAT handover in terms of types. 5 Outgoing Call Procedure The outgoing call procedure is performed for a UE to call another terminal. signaling procedure of a successful outgoing call. triggering conditions. and signaling in normal and abnormal conditions. 10 SRNS Relocation Procedure 2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. signaling procedure of a successful inter-frequency handover. This chapter describes the location update in terms of protocols. such as a Public Switched Telephony Network (PSTN) terminal. and signaling in normal and abnormal conditions. This topic describes incoming call setup and release in terms of protocols. This topic describes the cell deletion procedure in terms of protocols. This topic also describes the elementary procedures in terms of functions. protocols. This topic also describes the elementary procedures in terms of functions. This topic also describes the elementary procedures in terms of functions.

could result in minor or moderate injury. Examples of information displayed on the screen are in Courier New. triggering conditions. and signaling in normal and abnormal conditions. Names of files. or unexpected results.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide About This Document The SRNS relocation procedure is performed to change control from the SRNC of a UE to another RNC. folders. directories. Conventions Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. log in as user root. General Conventions The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation. which if not avoided. which if not avoided. protocols. Ltd.could result in equipment damage.. This topic describes the location services in terms of positioning methods.will result in death or serious injury. For example. protocols. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text. data loss. and signaling tracing on the RNC LMT. Book titles are in italics. triggering conditions. and users are in boldface. 3 Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. . Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. This topic describes the SRNS relocation in terms of types. and signaling tracing on the RNC LMT. triggering conditions. Symbol Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk. signaling procedure of successful positioning. Convention Times New Roman Boldface Italic Courier New Description Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman. signaling procedure of a successful SRNS relocation. This topic also describes the elementary procedures in terms of functions. which if not avoided. triggering conditions. This topic also describes the elementary procedures in terms of functions. 11 Location Service Procedure The location service procedure is performed to identify the geographic location of a UE. performance degradation. and signaling in normal and abnormal conditions.

Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) .. and dialog titles are in boldface. ]* GUI Conventions The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. 4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. click OK. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. choose File > Create > Folder . For example. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. A means the two keys should be pressed in turn. Keyboard Operations The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Press the keys concurrently..About This Document RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Command Conventions The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Key 2 Description Press the key. Ltd. Mouse Operations The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows. For example. Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. Command arguments are in italics.. Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs.. Convention Boldface Italic [] { x | y | . tabs. menus.. pressing Ctrl+Alt +A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently. Press the keys in turn.. One item is selected or no item is selected. Convention Boldface > Description Buttons. window. Several items or no item can be selected. ] { x | y | . }* Description The keywords of a command line are in boldface. } [ x | y | . For example. For example. Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be selected. One item is selected. For example. parameters. press Enter and press Tab. pressing Alt. Format Key Key 1+Key 2 Key 1... [ x | y | ..

5 ..RAN Signalling Analysis Guide About This Document Action Click Double-click Drag Description Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer. Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain position. Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without moving the pointer. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.

.

1 Protocols Related to Cell Setup The cell setup procedure complies with some 3GPP TS25 protocols and an ITU-T protocol. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 1 Cell Setup Procedure 1 About This Chapter Cell Setup Procedure The cell setup procedure is performed to set up a WCDMA cell.3 Signaling Procedure of Successful Cell Setup This describes the signaling procedure of successful cell setup. triggering conditions. This topic also describes the elementary procedures in terms of functions.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Cell Setup Procedure The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure of cell setup. 1. Ltd. triggering conditions. 1.5 Elementary Procedures of Cell Setup This describes the elementary procedures of cell setup in terms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions. 1-1 . and signaling in normal and abnormal conditions. 1. 1.. 1. signaling procedure of successful cell setup. refer to the elementary procedures. and signaling tracing on the RNC LMT. This topic describes cell setup in terms of protocols.2 Triggering Conditions of Cell Setup Cell setup can be triggered either through execution of an MML command or with a resource audit response from the NodeB. For the messages related to cell setup failures.

. Feature The resource audit procedure is excluded from cell setup. Figure 1-1 shows the signaling procedure of successful cell setup. 1-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.433 "UTRAN Iub interface Node B Application Part (NBAP) signaling" 3GPP TS25. Ltd. The compliance protocols are as follows: l l l 3GPP TS25.2 Triggering Conditions of Cell Setup Cell setup can be triggered either through execution of an MML command or with a resource audit response from the NodeB. the CRNC sends a cell setup request to the NodeB if the cell setup requirements are fulfilled. Table 1-1 Triggering conditions of cell setup Triggering Condition Cell setup is initiated by the RNC LMT. For the messages related to cell setup failures. The CRNC receives a resource audit response from the NodeB.427 "UTRAN Iur/Iub interface user plane protocol for DCH data streams" 3GPP TS25.1 Protocols Related to Cell Setup The cell setup procedure complies with some 3GPP TS25 protocols and an ITU-T protocol. Table 1-1 describes the two triggering conditions.435 "UTRAN Iub interface user plane protocols for Common Transport Channel data streams" ITU-T Q.1 Cell Setup Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 1. 1. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) .3 Signaling Procedure of Successful Cell Setup This describes the signaling procedure of successful cell setup.2630 "AAL type 2 Signalling Protocol" l 1. After receiving the resource audit response from the NodeB. The resource audit procedure is involved in cell setup. refer to the elementary procedures. Description Run the ACT CELL command on the RNC LMT in online mode.

Ltd. the Iub user plane setup procedure is excluded from cell setup. If IP transport is applied to the Iub interface. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Context Table 1-2 lists the messages to be traced. You are logged in to the RNC as a user authorized to perform tracing management. 1-3 . The physical shared channel reconfiguration procedure is involved in cell setup only when the cell to be set up is a High Speed Downlink Packet Access (HSDPA) cell. Prerequisite l l The RNC LMT works properly.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 1 Cell Setup Procedure Figure 1-1 Signaling procedure of successful cell setup Note the following information about the procedure shown in Figure 1-1: l The resource status indication and resource audit procedures are involved in cell setup only when the cell setup is triggered with a resource audit response from the NodeB..4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Cell Setup Procedure The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure of cell setup. l l 1.

Ltd. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) .1 Cell Setup Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Table 1-2 Messages to be traced Interface and Protocol to Be Traced Message Name on the LMT NBAP_AUDIT_REQ NBAP_AUDIT_RSP NBAP_AUDIT_FAIL NBAP_CELL_SETUP_REQ NBAP_CELL_SETUP_RSP NBAP_CELL_SETUP_FAIL NBAP_CELL_DEL_REQ NBAP_CELL_DEL_RSP NBAP_COMM_TRANSP_C H_SETUP_REQ NBAP_COMM_TRANSP_C H_SETUP_RSP NBAP_COMM_TRANSP_C H_SETUP_FAIL Iub NBAP_SYS_INFO_UPDATE _REQ NBAP_SYS_INFO_UPDATE _RSP NBAP_SYS_INFO_UPDATE _FAIL NBAP_PSCH_RECFG_REQ NBAP_PSCH_RECFG_RSP NBAP_PSCH_RECFG_FAIL NBAP_COMM_MEAS_INI_ REQ NBAP_COMM_MEAS_INI_ RSP NBAP_COMM_MEAS_INI_ FAIL Message Name in Protocols AUDIT REQUEST AUDIT RESPONSE AUDIT FAILURE CELL SETUP REQUEST CELL SETUP RESPONSE CELL SETUP FAILURE CELL DELETION REQUEST CELL DELETION RESPONSE COMMON TRANSPORT CHANNEL SETUP REQUEST COMMON TRANSPORT CHANNEL SETUP RESPONSE COMMON TRANSPORT CHANNEL SETUP FAILURE SYSTEM INFORMATION UPDATE REQUEST SYSTEM INFORMATION UPDATE RESPONSE SYSTEM INFORMATION UPDATE FAILURE PHYSICAL SHARED CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION REQUEST PHYSICAL SHARED CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION RESPONSE PHYSICAL SHARED CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION FAILURE COMMON MEASUREMENT INITIATION REQUEST COMMON MEASUREMENT INITIATION RESPONSE COMMON MEASUREMENT INITIATION FAILURE 1-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..

and an Acquisition Indicator Channel (AICH). The PRACH carries a Random Access Channel (RACH). Ltd. an HSDPA cell is set up. a Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH).AAL2 protocol tracing result. Procedure Step 1 Create an Iub tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task..AAL2 protocol tracing result Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the common transport channel setup procedure is performed to set up a Secondary Common Control Physical Channel (S-CCPCH). In this example.AAL2 No message name needs to be specified. Step 2 Create a Q. Figure 1-2 shows an example of Iub signaling tracing result. Figure 1-3 Example of Q. Figure 1-3 shows an example of Q. the messages transmitted during cell setup depend on the configured data. a Paging Indicator Channel (PICH). The S-CCPCH carries two Forward Access Channels (FACHs) and a Paging Channel (PCH).RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 1 Cell Setup Procedure Interface and Protocol to Be Traced Message Name on the LMT NBAP_COMM_MEAS_RPR T Message Name in Protocols COMMON MEASUREMENT REPORT – Q.AAL2 tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task. During the cell setup. 1-5 . Figure 1-2 Example of Iub signaling tracing result In practice.

PRACH. PICH.4 Common Transport Channel Setup Procedure The common transport channel setup procedure is performed to establish the necessary resources in the NodeB.7 Physical Shared Channel Reconfiguration Procedure The physical shared channel reconfiguration procedure is performed for the NodeB to reconfigure the physical channels according to the PHYSICAL SHARED CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION REQUEST message sent from the CRNC. 1. FACH.1 Resource Status Indication Procedure The NodeB performs the resource status indication procedure to report its physical resources to the Control RNC (CRNC). Ltd. 1. 1.5. 1.3 Cell Setup Procedure The cell setup procedure is performed to set up a cell in the NodeB. Triggering Conditions The NodeB triggers the procedure in one of the following conditions: 1-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and RACH.5 Elementary Procedures of Cell Setup This describes the elementary procedures of cell setup in terms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions.8 Common Measurement Initiation Procedure The common measurement initiation procedure is performed for the CRNC to request the initiation of measurements on common resources in a NodeB.5 Iub User Plane Setup Procedure The Iub user plane setup procedure is performed to set up bearers for data transmission on the Iub interface.1 Resource Status Indication Procedure The NodeB performs the resource status indication procedure to report its physical resources to the Control RNC (CRNC). regarding the following channels: S-CCPCH.5.5.5.6 System Information Update Procedure The system information update procedure is performed for the NodeB to schedule and update the system information segments.5. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . according to the parameters in the SYSTEM INFORMATION UPDATE REQUEST message. 1. 1.5. which are broadcast on the Broadcast Control Channel (BCCH). 1. AICH.5. 1. PCH..5. 1. The audit may let the CRNC know the logical resources of the NodeB and re-synchronize its resources with those of the NodeB.2 Resource Audit Procedure The CRNC performs the resource audit procedure to audit the configuration and status of the logical resources in the NodeB. The NodeB then initiates the requested measurements according to the parameters given in the COMMON MEASUREMENT INITIATION REQUEST message sent from the CRNC.5.1 Cell Setup Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide ----End 1.

A Communication Control Port (CCP) changes its resource operational state at the NodeB. The audit may let the CRNC know the logical resources of the NodeB and re-synchronize its resources with those of the NodeB.5. A cell changes its capability or resource operational state or both capability and resource operational state at the NodeB. The capabilities of a local cell change at the NodeB.. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. This message contains the triggering condition and the associated logical resource information. 1. Ltd. A local cell group changes its resource capability at the NodeB.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide l l l l 1 Cell Setup Procedure A local cell is added to the NodeB. l l l Procedure Figure 1-4 shows the resource status indication procedure. A local cell is deleted from the NodeB.2 Resource Audit Procedure The CRNC performs the resource audit procedure to audit the configuration and status of the logical resources in the NodeB. Common physical channels or common transport channels or both common physical channels and common transport channels change their capabilities at the NodeB. Triggering Conditions The CRNC receives a RESOURCE STATUS INDICATION message from the NodeB. Figure 1-4 Resource status indication procedure The NodeB sends a RESOURCE STATUS INDICATION message to the CRNC through the NodeB Control Port (NCP). 1-7 .

. l If the audit is successful. the CRNC checks whether the conditions of cell setup are fulfilled and. 1. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . In this way. Each procedure carries an audit sequence number. The information about local cell and local cell group is the abstraction of the physical resources of the NodeB. The CRNC sends an AUDIT REQUEST message to the NodeB through the NCP to initiate the resource audit procedure. NOTE A complete audit of a NodeB can be performed by one or more audit procedures. l If the audit fails.5. the NodeB sends an AUDIT FAILURE message. local cell. The NodeB sends a response message to the CRNC through the NCP. Ltd. if fulfilled. Figure 1-5 Resource audit procedure The procedure shown in Figure 1-5 is described as follows: 1. and local cell group. The AUDIT RESPONSE message contains information about common physical channels of the logical cell. 2. the NodeB sends an AUDIT RESPONSE message. Triggering Conditions After receiving the AUDIT RESPONSE message from the NodeB.3 Cell Setup Procedure The cell setup procedure is performed to set up a cell in the NodeB. Whether the conditions of cell setup are fulfilled depends on the following local cell information reported by the NodeB: 1-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the CRNC can allocate the logical resources of the cell according to the abstract data.1 Cell Setup Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Procedure Figure 1-5 shows the resource audit procedure. sends a CELL SETUP REQUEST message to the NodeB. CCP.

and RACH.. which is used to set up an HSDPA cell Common transport channel and physical channel information CCP and NCP information l l Procedure Figure 1-6 shows the cell setup procedure. PRACH. l l If the cell is set up. 1-9 . Triggering Conditions The NodeB sends a CELL SETUP RESPONSE message to the CRNC. 1. Figure 1-6 Cell setup procedure The procedure shown in Figure 1-6 is described as follows: 1. AICH. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. PICH. PCH.5. The NodeB sends a response message to the CRNC through the NCP. 2. regarding the following channels: S-CCPCH. the NodeB sends a CELL SETUP FAILURE message. The NodeB then sets up a new cell according to the parameters given in the message.4 Common Transport Channel Setup Procedure The common transport channel setup procedure is performed to establish the necessary resources in the NodeB. The CRNC sends a CELL SETUP REQUEST message to the NodeB through the NCP. Ltd. the NodeB sends a CELL SETUP RESPONSE message.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide l l l l 1 Cell Setup Procedure Downlink power range Minimum spreading factor HSDPA cell capability of the NodeB High Speed Downlink Shared Channel (HS-DSCH) resource information. If the cell fails to be set up. FACH.

Figure 1-7 Common transport channel setup procedure The procedure shown in Figure 1-7 is described as follows: 1. PCH and PICH One PRACH and the related RACH and AICH If the common transport channels are set up. If the common transport channels fail to be set up. the NodeB sends a COMMON TRANSPORT CHANNEL SETUP RESPONSE message. the cell deletion procedure is triggered. The NodeB sends a response message to the CRNC through the NCP. the NodeB sends a COMMON TRANSPORT CHANNEL SETUP FAILURE message. The CRNC sends a COMMON TRANSPORT CHANNEL SETUP REQUEST message to the NodeB through the NCP. The dedicated transport channels are set up.1 Cell Setup Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Procedure Figure 1-7 shows the common transport channel setup procedure. One message can be used to configure only one of the following combinations: l l One S-CCPCH and the related FACHs. l l 1. 2. Procedure Figure 1-8 shows the Iub user plane setup procedure..5. Triggering Conditions The Iub user plane setup procedure can be triggered in one of the following conditions: l l The common transport channels are set up. Ltd. 1-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) .5 Iub User Plane Setup Procedure The Iub user plane setup procedure is performed to set up bearers for data transmission on the Iub interface. At the same time.

5. l If the Iub data transport bearers are set up. 2. All common transport channels are set up. the NodeB sends a QAAL2 ESTABLISH RELEASE CONFIRM message. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the NodeB sends a QAAL2 ESTABLISH CONFIRM message. Triggering Conditions The system information update procedure can be triggered in one of the following conditions: l l l Physical shared channels are reconfigured. The NodeB uses the ALCAP protocol to send a response message to the CRNC. The CRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to send a QAAL2 ESTABLISH REQUEST message to the NodeB. l 1. Ltd. Procedure Figure 1-9 shows the system information update procedure..RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 1 Cell Setup Procedure Figure 1-8 Iub user plane setup procedure The procedure shown in Figure 1-8 is described as follows: 1. Cells are reconfigured. according to the parameters in the SYSTEM INFORMATION UPDATE REQUEST message. 1-11 .6 System Information Update Procedure The system information update procedure is performed for the NodeB to schedule and update the system information segments. which are broadcast on the Broadcast Control Channel (BCCH). If an Iub data transport bearer fails to be set up.

The message includes the system information that is broadcast in segments on the BCCH and the scheduling information of each segment. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . l If the system information is updated.7 Physical Shared Channel Reconfiguration Procedure The physical shared channel reconfiguration procedure is performed for the NodeB to reconfigure the physical channels according to the PHYSICAL SHARED CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION REQUEST message sent from the CRNC. Procedure Figure 1-10 shows the physical shared channel reconfiguration procedure. Ltd. the cell deletion procedure is triggered. If the system information fails to be updated. l 1. At the same time. The NodeB schedules and updates the system information segments on the BCCH according to the parameters in the message.. The NodeB sends a response message to the CRNC through the NCP.1 Cell Setup Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Figure 1-9 System information update procedure The procedure shown in Figure 1-9 is described as follows: 1. The CRNC sends a SYSTEM INFORMATION UPDATE REQUEST message to the NodeB through the NCP.5. 3. 1-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 2. Triggering Conditions The system information is updated and the cell to be set up is an HSDPA cell. the NodeB sends a SYSTEM INFORMATION UPDATE FAILURE message. the NodeB sends a SYSTEM INFORMATION UPDATE RESPONSE message.

8 Common Measurement Initiation Procedure The common measurement initiation procedure is performed for the CRNC to request the initiation of measurements on common resources in a NodeB. The CRNC sends a PHYSICAL SHARED CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION REQUEST message to the NodeB through the NCP to initiate the reconfiguration of the resources on the HS-DSCH and Enhanced UL DCH (E-DCH). The NodeB sends a response message to the CRNC through the NCP.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 1 Cell Setup Procedure Figure 1-10 Physical shared channel reconfiguration procedure The procedure shown in Figure 1-10 is described as follows: 1. Ltd. the NodeB sends a PHYSICAL SHARED CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION FAILURE message. If the physical shared channels are reconfigured. l 2.5. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Procedure Figure 1-11 shows the common measurement initiation procedure.. If the physical shared channels fail to be reconfigured. l 1. Triggering Conditions The cell is set up and activated. the NodeB sends a PHYSICAL SHARED CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION RESPONSE message. The NodeB then initiates the requested measurements according to the parameters given in the COMMON MEASUREMENT INITIATION REQUEST message sent from the CRNC. 1-13 .

If the measurement requested by the CRNC is initiated. l 2. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . If the measurement requested by the CRNC fails to be initiated.1 Cell Setup Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Figure 1-11 Common measurement initiation procedure The procedure shown in Figure 1-11 is described as follows: 1. and event report). The NodeB initiates the requested measurement according to the parameters given in the message.. Ltd. periodic report. l 1-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the NodeB sends a COMMON MEASUREMENT INITIATION RESPONSE message. 3. The message includes the measurement object type (such as cell and RACH). and report characteristics (such as On-Demand report. the NodeB sends a COMMON MEASUREMENT INITIATION FAILURE message. The CRNC sends a COMMON MEASUREMENT INITIATION REQUEST message to the NodeB through the NCP to initiate the common measurement initiation procedure. The NodeB sends a response message to the CRNC through the NCP. common measurement type (such as transmit carrier power and received total wide band power).

2. 2. Ltd.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Cell Reconfiguration Procedure The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure of cell reconfiguration. triggering conditions. signaling procedure. This topic describes the cell reconfiguration procedure in terms of protocols. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.1 Protocols Related to Cell Reconfiguration The cell reconfiguration procedure complies with a 3GPP TS25 protocol. 2.. 2-1 .2 Triggering Conditions of Cell Reconfiguration Cell reconfiguration is triggered when the parameters of the cell in the NodeB are modified on the RNC LMT. and signaling tracing on the RNC LMT.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 2 Cell Reconfiguration Procedure 2 About This Chapter Cell Reconfiguration Procedure The cell reconfiguration procedure is performed to reconfigure a cell in the NodeB. 2.3 Signaling Procedure of Cell Reconfiguration This describes the signaling procedure of cell reconfiguration.

2 Cell Reconfiguration Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 2..2 Triggering Conditions of Cell Reconfiguration Cell reconfiguration is triggered when the parameters of the cell in the NodeB are modified on the RNC LMT. The NodeB sends a response message to the CRNC through the NCP.3 Signaling Procedure of Cell Reconfiguration This describes the signaling procedure of cell reconfiguration. The CRNC sends a CELL RECONFIGURATION REQUEST message to the NodeB through the NCP. Figure 2-1 shows the cell reconfiguration procedure. To modify parameters of the cell in the NodeB. The compliance protocol is the 3GPP TS25. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) 2-2 . 2. l 2. Ltd. 2. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.1 Protocols Related to Cell Reconfiguration The cell reconfiguration procedure complies with a 3GPP TS25 protocol. The NodeB then reconfigures the cell according to the parameters given in the message. run the MOD CELL command online on the RNC LMT. the NodeB sends a CELL RECONFIGURATION RESPONSE message. Figure 2-1 Cell reconfiguration procedure The procedure shown in Figure 2-1 is described as follows: 1.433 "UTRAN Iub interface Node B Application Part (NBAP) signaling". If the cell is reconfigured.

RAN Signalling Analysis Guide
l

2 Cell Reconfiguration Procedure

If the cell fails to be reconfigured, the NodeB sends a CELL RECONFIGURATION FAILURE message.

2.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Cell Reconfiguration Procedure
The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure of cell reconfiguration.

Prerequisite
l l

The RNC LMT works properly. You are logged in to the RNC as a user authorized to perform tracing management.

Context
Table 2-1 lists the messages to be traced. Table 2-1 Messages to be traced Interface and Protocol to Be Traced Message Name on the LMT Message Name in Protocols CELL RECONFIGURATION REQUEST CELL RECONFIGURATION RESPONSE CELL RECONFIGURATION FAILURE

NBAP_CELL_RECFG_REQ Iub NBAP_CELL_RECFG_RSP NBAP_CELL_RECFG_FAIL

Procedure
Create an Iub tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task. Figure 2-2 shows an example of Iub signaling tracing result. Figure 2-2 Example of Iub signaling tracing result

----End

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-3

RAN Signalling Analysis Guide

3 Cell Deletion Procedure

3
About This Chapter

Cell Deletion Procedure

The cell deletion procedure is performed to delete a cell from the NodeB. This topic describes the cell deletion procedure in terms of protocols, triggering conditions, signaling procedure, and signaling tracing on the RNC LMT. 3.1 Protocols Related to Cell Deletion The cell deletion procedure complies with a 3GPP TS25 protocol. 3.2 Triggering Conditions of Cell Deletion Cell deletion can be triggered in different conditions, for example, when the common transport channels fail to be set up. 3.3 Signaling Procedure of Cell Deletion This describes the signaling procedure of cell deletion. 3.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Cell Deletion Procedure The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure of cell deletion.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-1

3 Cell Deletion Procedure

RAN Signalling Analysis Guide

3.1 Protocols Related to Cell Deletion
The cell deletion procedure complies with a 3GPP TS25 protocol. The compliance protocol is the 3GPP TS25.433 "UTRAN Iub interface Node B Application Part (NBAP) signalling".

3.2 Triggering Conditions of Cell Deletion
Cell deletion can be triggered in different conditions, for example, when the common transport channels fail to be set up. The cell deletion procedure can be triggered in one of the following conditions:
l l l l l

The common transport channels fail to be set up. The system information fails to be updated. The common transport channels are deleted. The cell is deactivated on the RNC LMT. The cell is deleted on the RNC LMT.

3.3 Signaling Procedure of Cell Deletion
This describes the signaling procedure of cell deletion. Figure 3-1 shows the cell deletion procedure. Figure 3-1 Cell deletion procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 3-1 is described as follows: 1.
3-2

The CRNC sends a CELL DELETION REQUEST message to the NodeB through the NCP.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

RAN Signalling Analysis Guide

3 Cell Deletion Procedure

2.

The NodeB performs the following operations:
l

Deletes the cell and any remaining common and dedicated channels within the cell. The states of the deleted cell and common channels are set to "Not existing". Initiates release of the user plane transport bearers for the removed common and dedicated channels. Deletes all radio links and all NodeB communication contexts within the cell.

l

l

3.

When the cell is deleted, the NodeB sends a CELL DELETION RESPONSE message to the CRNC through the NCP. If the CELL DELETION REQUEST message includes a C-ID IE value that does not exist in the NodeB, the NodeB sends through the NCP to the CRNC the CELL DELETION RESPONSE message, in which the value of Criticality Diagnostics is "Not existing".

3.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Cell Deletion Procedure
The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure of cell deletion.

Prerequisite
l l

The RNC LMT works properly. You are logged in to the RNC as a user authorized to perform tracing management.

Context
Table 3-1 lists the messages to be traced. Table 3-1 Messages to be traced Interface and Protocol to Be Traced Iub Message Name on the LMT NBAP_CELL_DEL_REQ NBAP_CELL_DEL_RSP Message Name in Protocols CELL DELETION REQUEST CELL DELETION RESPONSE

Procedure
Create an Iub tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task. Figure 3-2 shows an example of Iub signaling tracing result. Figure 3-2 Example of Iub signaling tracing result

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-3

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) .3 Cell Deletion Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide ----End 3-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Ltd.

1 Protocols Related to Location Update The location update procedure complies with some 3GPP TS25 protocols and an ITU-T protocol. and elementary procedures. 4-1 . 4. This chapter also describes the elementary procedures in terms of functions. triggering conditions.5 Elementary Procedures of Location Update This describes the elementary procedures of location update in terms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions. signaling tracing on the RNC LMT. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 4. 4. Routing area update is initiated by the UE to inform the PS service domain of the core network that the UE has entered a new routing area.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 4 Location Update Procedure 4 About This Chapter Location Update Procedure Location area update is initiated by the UE to inform the CS service domain of the core network that the UE has entered a new location area. procedure..2 Triggering Conditions of Location Update Location update is triggered after the UE is powered on. and signaling in abnormal conditions.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Location Update Procedure The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure of a location update.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Location Update This describes the signaling procedure of a successful location update. triggering conditions. refer to the elementary procedures. signaling procedure of successful location update. Ltd. For the messages related to location update failures. 4. 4. This chapter describes the location update in terms of protocols.

Figure 4-1 shows the signaling procedure of a successful location update.. 4-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) .413 "UTRAN Iu interface RANAP signalling" 3GPP TS25. Ltd. After being powered on. refer to the elementary procedures.2 Triggering Conditions of Location Update Location update is triggered after the UE is powered on. The compliance protocols are as follows: l l l l 3GPP TS25.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Location Update This describes the signaling procedure of a successful location update.433 "UTRAN Iub interface Node B Application Part (NBAP) signalling" ITU-T Q.4 Location Update Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 4.1 Protocols Related to Location Update The location update procedure complies with some 3GPP TS25 protocols and an ITU-T protocol. For the messages related to location update failures. Then. the UE searches for a cell and then receives broadcast messages.331 "Radio Resource Control (RRC)" 3GPP TS25. 4. the UE triggers the location update procedure.2630 "AAL type 2 Signalling Protocol" 4.

Prerequisite l l The RNC LMT works properly.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Location Update Procedure The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure of a location update.. If IP transport is applied to the Iub interface. You are logged in to the RNC as a user authorized to perform tracing management. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 4-3 . This procedure takes the RRC connection set up on the DCH as an example. Context Table 4-1 lists the messages to be traced.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 4 Location Update Procedure Figure 4-1 Signaling procedure of a successful location update Note the following information about the procedure shown in Figure 4-1: l The RRC connection can be set up on a DCH or a CCH. no ALCAP procedure is performed on the Iub interface after radio links are set up or deleted. Ltd. l 4.

Ltd. Figure 4-2 shows an example of Uu signaling tracing result.. 4-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) .4 Location Update Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Table 4-1 Messages to be traced Interface and Protocol to Be Traced Message Name on the LMT RRC_RRC_CONNECT_REQ RRC_RRC_CONN_SETUP RRC_RRC_CONN_REJ RRC_RRC_CONNECT_SET UP_CMP Uu RRC_INIT_DIRECT_TRANS F RRC_DL_DIRECT_TRANSF RRC_UL_DIR_TRANSF RRC_RRC_CONN_REL RRC_RRC_CONN_REL_CM P NBAP_RL_SETUP_REQ NBAP_RL_SETUP_RSP Iub NBAP_RL_SETUP_FAIL NBAP_RL_RESTORE_IND NBAP_RL_DEL_REQ NBAP_RL_DEL_RSP RANAP_INITIAL_UE_MES SAGE RANAP_COMMON_ID Iu RANAP_DIRECT_TRANSFE R RANAP_IU_RELEASE_CO MMAND RANAP_IU_RELEASE_CO MPLETE Message Name in Protocols RRC CONNECTION REQUEST RRC CONNECTION SETUP RRC CONNECTION REJECT RRC CONNECTION SETUP COMPLETE INITIAL DIRECT TRANSFER DOWNLINK DIRECT TRANSFER UPLINK DIRECT TRANSFER RRC CONNECTION RELEASE RRC CONNECTION RELEASE COMPLETE RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST RADIO LINK SETUP RESPONSE RADIO LINK SETUP FAILURE RADIO LINK RESTORE INDICATION RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST RADIO LINK DELETION RESPONSE INITIAL UE MESSAGE COMMON ID DIRECT TRANSFER IU RELEASE COMMAND IU RELEASE COMPLETE Procedure Step 1 Create a Uu tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.

Figure 4-3 shows an example of Iub signaling tracing result. Ltd. Figure 4-3 Example of Iub signaling tracing result Step 3 Create an Iu tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task. 4-5 .RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 4 Location Update Procedure Figure 4-2 Example of Uu signaling tracing result Step 2 Create an Iub tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.. Figure 4-4 Example of Iu signaling tracing result ----End Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Figure 4-4 shows an example of Iu signaling tracing result.

1 RRC Connection Setup Procedure The RRC connection setup procedure is performed for the UE to set up a signaling connection to the SRNC.5 Elementary Procedures of Location Update This describes the elementary procedures of location update in terms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions. Procedure When the SRNC receives an RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message from the UE.1 RRC Connection Setup Procedure The RRC connection setup procedure is performed for the UE to set up a signaling connection to the SRNC.5. based on a specific RRM algorithm.3 Iu Release Procedure The Iu release procedure is performed for the CN to release an Iu connection and all the UTRAN resources related only to that Iu connection. RRC connection setup is always initiated by the UE.5. 4.4 Location Update Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 4. 4. Figure 4-5 shows the procedure for setting up an RRC connection on a DCH. Triggering Conditions The UE in idle mode initiates the RRC connection setup procedure when the NAS of the UE requests the establishment of a signaling connection. If accepting the request. Typically. RRC connection setup is always initiated by the UE. the RRM module further determines whether to set up the RRC connection on a Dedicated Channel (DCH) or on a Common Channel (CCH)..2 Location Update Procedure The location update procedure is performed to update the location of a UE. 4-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.5. One UE has a maximum of one RRC connection at a time. 4. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) .4 RRC Connection Release Procedure The RRC connection release procedure is performed to release the signaling connection and all radio bearers between the UE and the UTRAN.5.5. Ltd. 4. One UE has a maximum of one RRC connection at a time. 4. the Radio Resource Management (RRM) module of the RNC determines whether to accept or reject the RRC connection request. based on a specific algorithm. an RRC connection is set up on the DCH.

The UE sends an RRC CONNECTION SETUP COMPLETE message to the SRNC through the uplink Dedicated Control Channel (DCCH) that is just set up. The message indicates that the RRC connection setup procedure ends. radio resources. 4-7 . Ltd. The SRNC sends an RRC CONNECTION SETUP message to the UE through the downlink CCCH.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 4 Location Update Procedure Figure 4-5 RRC connection setup procedure on a DCH The procedure shown in Figure 4-5 is described as follows: 1. 2. This procedure is optional. Based on the cause in the RRC connection request and the system resource status. 4. The UE sends an RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message to the SRNC through the uplink CCCH. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. requesting the NodeB to allocate the specific radio link resources required for an RRC connection. 3. It is required for the ATM-based Iub interface only. and L1 and L2 resources. requesting the establishment of an RRC connection. The message contains the information about the DCH allocated by the SRNC. 5. Figure 4-6 shows the procedure for setting up an RRC connection on a CCH. the SRNC determines to set up the RRC connection on a DCH and allocates the Radio Network Temporary Identity (RNTI). The NodeB responds with a RADIO LINK SETUP RESPONSE message to the SRNC after successfully preparing the resources.. 6. The SRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to set up the Iub user plane transport bearer and performs the synchronization between the SRNC and the NodeB. Then the SRNC sends a RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message to the NodeB.

The message contains the information about the CCH. The SRNC maps the logical channel of the UE onto a specific CCH in the cell. the SRNC determines to set up the RRC connection on a CCH. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) 4-8 . based on a specific algorithm. 3. Ltd. The UE sends an RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message to the SRNC through the uplink CCCH. The message indicates the reason for rejecting the RRC connection request. Based on the cause in the RRC connection request and the system resource status. The SRNC determines to reject the RRC connection request. Then.4 Location Update Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Figure 4-6 RRC connection setup procedure on a CCH The procedure shown in Figure 4-6 is described as follows: 1. The message indicates that the RRC connection setup procedure ends. requesting the establishment of an RRC connection. the SRNC sends an RRC CONNECTION REJECT message to the UE. The SRNC then sends an RRC CONNECTION SETUP message to the UE through the downlink CCCH. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Figure 4-7 RRC connection rejected procedure The procedure shown in Figure 4-7 is described as follows: 1. requesting the establishment of an RRC connection. The UE sends an RRC CONNECTION SETUP COMPLETE message to the SRNC through the uplink CCCH. 2. Figure 4-7 shows the RRC connection rejected procedure. The UE sends an RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message to the SRNC through the uplink CCCH. 2..

The SRNC sends an INITIAL UE MESSAGE to the PS service domain of the CN through the Iu interface for routing area update. The CN might also perform authentication and ciphering. Triggering Conditions An RRC connection is set up between the UE and the Serving RNC (SRNC). Figure 4-8 Location update procedure The procedure shown in Figure 4-8 is described as follows: 1. The message indicates ATTACH REQUEST and contains the Routing Area Identity (RAI) 3. The SRNC sends an INITIAL UE MESSAGE to the CS service domain of the CN through the Iu interface. Procedure Figure 4-8 shows the location update procedure. such as the Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity (TMSI). Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . Then. and Location Area Identity (LAI).2 Location Update Procedure The location update procedure is performed to update the location of a UE. The message indicates LOCATION UPDATE REQUEST and contains the UE information. The message indicates LOCATION UPDATE ACCEPT and contains the TMSI that is assigned to the UE. The UE sends an INITIAL DIRECT TRANSFER message to the SRNC through the RRC connection. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the CN sends a DIRECT TRANSFER message to the SRNC..5.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 4 Location Update Procedure 4. 4-9 2. International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI). The message contains the Non Access Stratum (NAS) information to be sent to the CN by the UE. The CN updates the location area information of the UE and saves the new LAI. Ltd.

The Serving Radio Network Subsystem (SRNS) is relocated. 6. The message indicates ATTACH ACCEPT and contains the TMSI that is assigned to the UE 4. The CN might also perform authentication and ciphering. For routing area update. 4. For routing area update.3 Iu Release Procedure The Iu release procedure is performed for the CN to release an Iu connection and all the UTRAN resources related only to that Iu connection. The UE receives the LOCATION UPDATE ACCEPT information and sends an UPLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message to the SRNC. The UTRAN requests the CN to release the resources on the Iu interface by. The message contains the information such as the NAS information and the CN ID. 5. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . the CN updates the routing area information of the UE and saves the new RAI. Ltd. Figure 4-9 Iu release procedure 4-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Triggering Conditions The Iu release procedure can be triggered in one of the following conditions: l l l l The transaction between the UE and the CN is complete. The SRNC transparently sends the contents of the UPLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message to the CN through a DIRECT TRANSFER message. The SRNC transparently sends the contents of the DIRECT TRANSFER message to the UE through a DOWNLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message. sending an IU RELEASE REQUEST message. The SRNS relocation is canceled after a relocation resource allocation procedure is complete. Then. it is ATTACH COMPLETE that the DIRECT TRANSFER message indicates.5.4 Location Update Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide For routing area update. The DIRECT TRANSFER message indicates TMSI REALLOCATION COMPLETE. the CN sends a DIRECT TRANSFER message to the SRNC. Procedure Figure 4-9 shows the Iu release procedure. for example.. it is the ATTACH ACCEPT information that the UE receives.

the CN will not send further RANAP connection-oriented messages on this particular connection.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 4 Location Update Procedure The procedure shown in Figure 4-9 is described as follows: 1. The SRNC releases the related UTRAN resources and then sends an IU RELEASE COMPLETE message to the CN. If a radio bearer fails to be set up. 2. Releasing an RRC Connection from a DCH Figure 4-10 shows the procedure for releasing an RRC connection from a DCH. The CN sends an IU RELEASE COMMAND message to the SRNC to initiate the Iu release procedure. NOTE If an RRC connection needs to be released after a successful outgoing call. I.5. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. there are two types of RRC connection release procedure: release of an RRC connection from a DCH and release of an RRC connection from a CCH. Ltd. the SRNC judges whether the RRC connection carries any other RAB of the UE. Procedure Based on the resource occupied by the RRC connection. 4. If judging that the RRC connection does not carry any other RAB of the UE.. The message indicates the cause for the release of the signaling connection. 4-11 . Triggering Conditions After an RAB is released.4 RRC Connection Release Procedure The RRC connection release procedure is performed to release the signaling connection and all radio bearers between the UE and the UTRAN. the SRNC initiates an RRC connection release procedure. the RRC connection on the DCH is released. the RRC connection on the CCH is released. NOTE After sending the IU RELEASE COMMAND message.

requesting the NodeB to delete the radio link resources in the NodeB. The SRNC sends a RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST message to the NodeB. the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK DELETION RESPONSE message to the SRNC. 3. If the SRNC does not receive an RRC CONNECTION RELEASE COMPLETE message from the UE after sending the RRC CONNECTION RELEASE message for four times. the RRC connection release procedure ends. The UE sends an RRC CONNECTION RELEASE COMPLETE message to the SRNC.4 Location Update Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Figure 4-10 RRC connection release procedure (from a DCH) The procedure shown in Figure 4-10 is described as follows: 1. (Optional. After releasing the resources.. The number of retransmissions and the transmission intervals are determined by the SRNC. The SRNC sends an RRC CONNECTION RELEASE message to the UE through the DCCH. 5. 2. Releasing an RRC Connection from a CCH Figure 4-11 shows the procedure for releasing an RRC connection from a CCH. The RRC SNs of these messages are the same. 4-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 4. II. NOTE The SRNC may send the RRC CONNECTION RELEASE message several times to increase the probability of proper reception of the message by the UE. Ltd. the SRNC judges that the UE has released the RRC connection. required for the ATM-based Iub interface only) The SRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to initiate an Iub user plane transport bearer release procedure. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . Then.

The SRNC sends an RRC CONNECTION RELEASE message to the UE through the CCCH. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 4-13 . The UE sends an RRC CONNECTION RELEASE COMPLETE message to the SRNC.. 2.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 4 Location Update Procedure Figure 4-11 RRC connection release procedure (from a CCH) The procedure shown in Figure 4-11 is described as follows: 1. Ltd.

.

refer to the elementary procedures. 5.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Outgoing Call This describes the signaling procedure of a successful outgoing call.. signaling procedure of a successful outgoing call. and signaling tracing on the RNC LMT.1 Protocols Related to an Outgoing Call The outgoing call procedure complies with some 3GPP TS25 protocols and an ITU-T protocol. 5.2 Triggering Conditions of an Outgoing Call An outgoing call is made by a UE when the UE calls another terminal.5 Elementary Procedures of an Outgoing Call This describes the elementary procedures of an outgoing call in terms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions. 5. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. triggering conditions. such as a Public Switched Telephony Network (PSTN) terminal. 5-1 . This topic describes outgoing call setup and release in terms of protocols. 5.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 5 Outgoing Call Procedure 5 About This Chapter Outgoing Call Procedure The outgoing call procedure is performed for a UE to call another terminal.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Outgoing Call Procedure The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure of an outgoing call. and signaling in normal and abnormal conditions. For the messages related to outgoing call failures. triggering conditions. Ltd. 5. This topic also describes the elementary procedures in terms of functions.

refer to the elementary procedures. Figure 5-1 shows the signaling procedure of a successful outgoing call.1 Protocols Related to an Outgoing Call The outgoing call procedure complies with some 3GPP TS25 protocols and an ITU-T protocol.433 "UTRAN Iub interface Node B Application Part (NBAP) signalling" ITU-T Q.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Outgoing Call This describes the signaling procedure of a successful outgoing call. 5. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . the triggering condition is that a UE calls a mobile phone or fixed-line phone when the UE camps on a cell.. Therefore.5 Outgoing Call Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 5. Ltd.413 "UTRAN Iu interface RANAP signalling" 3GPP TS25.2630 "AAL type 2 Signalling Protocol" 5. The compliance protocols are as follows: l l l l 3GPP TS25.2 Triggering Conditions of an Outgoing Call An outgoing call is made by a UE when the UE calls another terminal. 5-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. For the messages related to outgoing call failures.331 "Radio Resource Control (RRC)" 3GPP TS25.

Ltd. 5-3 .RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 5 Outgoing Call Procedure Figure 5-1 Signaling procedure of a successful outgoing call Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..

. Context Table 5-1 lists the messages to be traced. This procedure takes the RRC connection set up on the DCH as an example. or deleted. Table 5-1 Messages to be traced Interface and Protocol to Be Traced Message Name on the LMT RRC_RRC_CONNECT_REQ RRC_RRC_CONN_SETUP RRC_RRC_CONN_REJ RRC_RRC_CONNECT_SET UP_CMP Uu RRC_INIT_DIRECT_TRANS F RRC_DL_DIRECT_TRANSF RRC_UL_DIR_TRANSF RRC_SECURITY_MODE_C MD RRC_SECURITY_MODE_C MP 5-4 Message Name in Protocols RRC CONNECTION REQUEST RRC CONNECTION SETUP RRC CONNECTION REJECT RRC CONNECTION SETUP COMPLETE INITIAL DIRECT TRANSFER DOWNLINK DIRECT TRANSFER UPLINK DIRECT TRANSFER SECURITY MODE COMMAND SECURITY MODE COMPLETE Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Outgoing Call Procedure The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure of an outgoing call. no ALCAP procedure is performed on the Iub interface after radio links are set up. l l 5.5 Outgoing Call Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Note the following information about the procedure shown in Figure 5-1: l The RRC connection can be set up on a DCH or a CCH. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . Ltd. If IP transport is applied to the Iub interface. reconfigured. You are logged in to the RNC as a user authorized to perform tracing management. no ALCAP procedure is performed on the Iu-CS interface after an RAB is set up or a call is released. Prerequisite l l The RNC LMT works properly. If IP transport is applied to the Iu-CS interface.

5-5 .RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 5 Outgoing Call Procedure Interface and Protocol to Be Traced Message Name on the LMT RRC_SECURITY_MODE_F AIL RRC_RB_SETUP RRC_RB_SETUP_CMP RRC_RB_SETUP_FAIL RRC_RRC_CONN_REL RRC_RRC_CONN_REL_CM P NBAP_RL_SETUP_REQ NBAP_RL_SETUP_RSP NBAP_RL_SETUP_FAIL NBAP_RL_RESTORE_IND NBAP_RL_RECFG_PREP NBAP_RL_RECFG_REDAY Message Name in Protocols SECURITY MODE FAILURE RADIO BEARER SETUP RADIO BEARER SETUP COMPLETE RADIO BEARER SETUP FAILURE RRC CONNECTION RELEASE RRC CONNECTION RELEASE COMPLETE RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST RADIO LINK SETUP RESPONSE RADIO LINK SETUP FAILURE RADIO LINK RESTORE INDICATION RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATION PREPARE RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATION READY RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATION FAILURE RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATION COMMIT RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATION CANCEL RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST RADIO LINK DELETION RESPONSE INITIAL UE MESSAGE COMMON ID DIRECT TRANSFER SECURITY MODE COMMAND SECURITY MODE COMPLETE Iub NBAP_RL_RECFG_FAIL NBAP_RL_RECFG_COMMI T NBAP_RL_RECFG_CANCE L NBAP_RL_DEL_REQ NBAP_RL_DEL_RSP RANAP_INITIAL_UE_MES SAGE RANAP_COMMON_ID Iu RANAP_DIRECT_TRANSFE R RANAP_SECURITY_MODE _COMMAND RANAP_SECURITY_MODE _COMPLETE Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Ltd.

The RRC_UL_DIR_TRANSF messages have different contents. Step 2 Create an Iub tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task. Figure 5-3 shows an example of Iub signaling tracing result. and so do the RRC_DL_DIRECT_TRANSF messages. Figure 5-2 Example of Uu signaling tracing result As shown in Figure 5-2. Ltd. Figure 5-2 shows an example of Uu signaling tracing result. multiple RRC_UL_DIR_TRANSF messages and RRC_DL_DIRECT_TRANSF messages are traced. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) .. That is because the UE and the RNC exchange signaling several times during the outgoing call procedure. 5-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.5 Outgoing Call Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Interface and Protocol to Be Traced Message Name on the LMT RANAP_SECURITY_MODE _REJ RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMEN T_REQ RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMEN T_RESP RANAP_IU_RELEASE_CO MMAND RANAP_IU_RELEASE_CO MPLETE Message Name in Protocols SECURITY MODE REJECT RAB ASSIGNMENT REQUEST RAB ASSIGNMENT RESPONSE IU RELEASE COMMAND IU RELEASE COMPLETE Procedure Step 1 Create a Uu tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.

5 Elementary Procedures of an Outgoing Call This describes the elementary procedures of an outgoing call in terms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions. RRC connection setup is always initiated by the UE. One UE has a maximum of one RRC connection at a time. The RANAP_DIRECT_TRANSFER messages have different contents. Ltd. multiple RANAP_DIRECT_TRANSFER messages are traced.1 RRC Connection Setup Procedure The RRC connection setup procedure is performed for the UE to set up a signaling connection to the SRNC.2 Signaling Connection Setup Procedure (Outgoing Call) Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. That is because the RNC and the CN exchange signaling several times during the outgoing call procedure. 5.5.. Figure 5-4 Example of Iu signaling tracing result As shown in Figure 5-4. ----End 5. Figure 5-4 shows an example of Iu signaling tracing result.5. 5. 5-7 .RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 5 Outgoing Call Procedure Figure 5-3 Example of Iub signaling tracing result Step 3 Create an Iu tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.

the Radio Resource Management (RRM) module of the RNC determines whether to accept or reject the RRC connection request. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . Procedure When the SRNC receives an RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message from the UE. connection setup.5. based on a specific RRM algorithm.3 Authentication and Security Mode Control Procedure The authentication and security mode control procedure is performed for the UE and the network to implement bi-directional authentication and to negotiate and configure the integrity protection algorithm and ciphering algorithm. This procedure ensures integrity and correctness of signaling.6 Call Release Procedure (Outgoing Call) The call release procedure is performed to release services and resources after a call ends. Figure 5-5 shows the procedure for setting up an RRC connection on a DCH.7 RRC Connection Release Procedure The RRC connection release procedure is performed to release the signaling connection and all radio bearers between the UE and the UTRAN.1 RRC Connection Setup Procedure The RRC connection setup procedure is performed for the UE to set up a signaling connection to the SRNC. If accepting the request.4 Call Setup Procedure (Outgoing Call) The call setup procedure is performed to set up a call.5. 5. an RRC connection is set up on the DCH. 5. 5. Triggering Conditions The UE in idle mode initiates the RRC connection setup procedure when the NAS of the UE requests the establishment of a signaling connection.. 5. Ltd. 5. RRC connection setup is always initiated by the UE. based on a specific algorithm. 5. 5-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.5.5 Outgoing Call Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide The signaling connection setup procedure is performed to exchange the NAS information between the UE and the CN.5 RAB Setup Procedure The RAB setup procedure is performed to set up a user plane bearer. Typically.5. The NAS information is related to authentication. service request. the RRM module further determines whether to set up the RRC connection on a Dedicated Channel (DCH) or on a Common Channel (CCH). and so on.5. One UE has a maximum of one RRC connection at a time.5.

5-9 . the SRNC determines to set up the RRC connection on a DCH and allocates the Radio Network Temporary Identity (RNTI).RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 5 Outgoing Call Procedure Figure 5-5 RRC connection setup procedure on a DCH The procedure shown in Figure 5-5 is described as follows: 1. Ltd. The UE sends an RRC CONNECTION SETUP COMPLETE message to the SRNC through the uplink Dedicated Control Channel (DCCH) that is just set up. It is required for the ATM-based Iub interface only. The NodeB responds with a RADIO LINK SETUP RESPONSE message to the SRNC after successfully preparing the resources. The message contains the information about the DCH allocated by the SRNC. 2. The SRNC sends an RRC CONNECTION SETUP message to the UE through the downlink CCCH. 3.. The message indicates that the RRC connection setup procedure ends. Based on the cause in the RRC connection request and the system resource status. 4. requesting the NodeB to allocate the specific radio link resources required for an RRC connection. 5. The SRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to set up the Iub user plane transport bearer and performs the synchronization between the SRNC and the NodeB. 6. The UE sends an RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message to the SRNC through the uplink CCCH. requesting the establishment of an RRC connection. Then the SRNC sends a RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message to the NodeB. This procedure is optional. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Figure 5-6 shows the procedure for setting up an RRC connection on a CCH. and L1 and L2 resources. radio resources.

the SRNC determines to set up the RRC connection on a CCH. Figure 5-7 RRC connection rejected procedure The procedure shown in Figure 5-7 is described as follows: 1. The message contains the information about the CCH. The SRNC then sends an RRC CONNECTION SETUP message to the UE through the downlink CCCH. requesting the establishment of an RRC connection.5 Outgoing Call Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Figure 5-6 RRC connection setup procedure on a CCH The procedure shown in Figure 5-6 is described as follows: 1. Figure 5-7 shows the RRC connection rejected procedure. the SRNC sends an RRC CONNECTION REJECT message to the UE. The UE sends an RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message to the SRNC through the uplink CCCH. The message indicates that the RRC connection setup procedure ends. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) 5-10 . Based on the cause in the RRC connection request and the system resource status. based on a specific algorithm. Then. The SRNC determines to reject the RRC connection request. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. 3. The UE sends an RRC CONNECTION SETUP COMPLETE message to the SRNC through the uplink CCCH. 2. The message indicates the reason for rejecting the RRC connection request.. 2. The SRNC maps the logical channel of the UE onto a specific CCH in the cell. requesting the establishment of an RRC connection. The UE sends an RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message to the SRNC through the uplink CCCH.

Procedure Figure 5-8 shows the signaling connection setup procedure. connection setup. Ltd.. and so on. After receiving the message. The NAS information is related to authentication.2 Signaling Connection Setup Procedure (Outgoing Call) The signaling connection setup procedure is performed to exchange the NAS information between the UE and the CN. The INITIAL UE MESSAGE contains the NAS information to be sent to the CN by the UE.5. The message contains the initial NAS information to be sent to the CN by the UE. 3. The SRNC receives the INITIAL DIRECT TRANSFER message from the UE and sends an INITIAL UE MESSAGE to the CN over the Iu interface. Triggering Conditions The UE sends a direct transfer message to initiate the signaling connection setup procedure. the CN sends a CONNECTION REJECT (CJ) message to the SRNC. The content of the NAS information is CM SERVICE REQUEST. The message indicates that the SCCP connection fails to be set up. the SRNC confirms that the signaling connection is set up. Figure 5-8 Signaling connection setup procedure The procedure shown in Figure 5-8 is described as follows: 1.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 5 Outgoing Call Procedure 5. l 2. service request. If accepting the request. the SRNC confirms that the signaling connection fails to be set up and then initiates the RRC release procedure. The message indicates that the SCCP connection is set up. The CN sends a response message to the SRNC. The UE sends an INITIAL DIRECT TRANSFER message to the SRNC through the RRC connection. the CN sends a CONNECTION CONFIRM (CC) message to the SRNC. 5-11 . If rejecting the request. l Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. After receiving the message.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) 5-12 . Procedure Figure 5-9 shows the authentication and security mode control procedure. indicating AUTHENTICATION Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 3.5 Outgoing Call Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 5. The SRNC transparently sends the contents of the UPLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message to the CN through a DIRECT TRANSFER message. This procedure ensures integrity and correctness of signaling. The message indicates AUTHENTICATION REQUEST. The network initiates the authentication and security mode control procedure.5. Triggering Conditions The UE and the CN exchange signaling.3 Authentication and Security Mode Control Procedure The authentication and security mode control procedure is performed for the UE and the network to implement bi-directional authentication and to negotiate and configure the integrity protection algorithm and ciphering algorithm. 4. Figure 5-9 Authentication and security mode control procedure The procedure shown in Figure 5-9 is described as follows: 1.. The SRNC transparently sends the contents of the DIRECT TRANSFER message to the UE through a DOWNLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message. Ltd. The UE sends an UPLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message to the SRNC. The CN sends a DIRECT TRANSFER message to the SRNC. 2.

5-13 . If the UE does not support the integrity protection and ciphering algorithms. Triggering Conditions The UE initiates a call. The message contains the information about the integrity protection and ciphering algorithms that the UE uses. If the integrity protection and ciphering algorithms are configured successfully. Ltd. The UE sends a response message to the SRNC. the UE returns a message with an XRES IE.4 Call Setup Procedure (Outgoing Call) The call setup procedure is performed to set up a call. l 6.. If the UMTS Subscriber Identity Module (USIM) judges that the authentication is successful. 5. The SRNC then sends a SECURITY MODE COMMAND COMPLETE message to the CN. Procedure Figure 5-10 shows the call setup procedure. The SRNC then sends a SECURITY MODE COMMAND REJECT message to the CN. The message contains the information about the supported ciphering and integrity protection algorithms. 7. the UE sends a SECURITY MODE COMMAND FAILURE message to the SRNC. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The CN sends a SECURITY MODE COMMAND message to the SRNC to initiate the security mode control procedure.5. l 5. The SRNC sends a SECURITY MODE COMMAND message to the UE to inform the UE of the integrity protection and ciphering algorithms that the UTRAN selects. the UE sends a SECURITY MODE COMMAND COMPLETE message to the SRNC.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 5 Outgoing Call Procedure RESPONSE. The message contains the error information and the reason for the failure.

5 RAB Setup Procedure. The SRNC transparently sends the contents of the DIRECT TRANSFER message to the UE through a DOWNLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message. 4. 7. The SRNC transparently sends the contents of the UPLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message to the CN through a DIRECT TRANSFER message. The SRNC transparently sends the contents of the DIRECT TRANSFER message to the UE through a DOWNLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message. When the called terminal rings. The UE sends an UPLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message to the SRNC. The message indicates ALERTING. 8. For details. refer to 5. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.5 Outgoing Call Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Figure 5-10 Call setup procedure (outgoing call) The procedure shown in Figure 5-10 is described as follows: 1. the CN sends a DIRECT TRANSFER message to the SRNC. 6. A Radio Access Bearer (RAB) is set up. The message indicates CONNECT. The message indicates CALL PROCEEDING and contains the information about the negotiated bearer capability of the call. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) 2. 5. 9. 5-14 . The CN sends a DIRECT TRANSFER message to the SRNC. 3.. which means that the called party has answered the call.5. The message contains the number of the called party and the information about the bearer capability of the call. The SRNC transparently sends the contents of the DIRECT TRANSFER message to the UE through a DOWNLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message. Ltd. The CN sends a DIRECT TRANSFER message to the SRNC.

. The UE sends an UPLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message to the SRNC. indicating CONNECT ACKNOWLEDGE.5. (Optional. applicable to the ATM-based Iu-CS interface only) The SRNC maps the Quality of Service (QoS) parameters for the RAB to the AAL2 link characteristic parameters and radio resource characteristic parameters. Procedure I. 2. The calling and called parties begin the conversation. 11. the ALCAP on the Iu interface initiates an Iu user plane transport bearer setup procedure. Based on the AAL2 link characteristic parameters.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 5 Outgoing Call Procedure 10. Setting Up an RAB Successfully Figure 5-11 shows the successful RAB setup procedure. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 5-15 Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . Figure 5-11 Successful RAB setup procedure The procedure shown in Figure 5-11 is described as follows: 1. The CN sends an RAB ASSIGNMENT REQUEST message to the SRNC to initiate the RAB setup procedure. The call is set up. The SRNC transparently sends the contents of the UPLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message to the CN through a DIRECT TRANSFER message.5 RAB Setup Procedure The RAB setup procedure is performed to set up a user plane bearer. 5. Triggering Conditions A call is set up. Ltd.

7. The SRNC sends an RAB ASSIGNMENT RESPONSE message to the CN. 5.5. 8.5 Outgoing Call Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 3. (Optional. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . 5. Ltd.6 Call Release Procedure (Outgoing Call) The call release procedure is performed to release services and resources after a call ends. 5-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The SRNC sends a RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATION COMMIT message to the NodeB. II. The CN sends an RAB ASSIGNMENT REQUEST message to the SRNC to initiate the RAB setup procedure. After performing the radio bearer setup. required for the ATM-based Iub interface only) The Iub ALCAP at the SRNC initiates an Iub user plane transport bearer setup procedure. The message indicates the ID of the RAB that fails to be set up and the reason for the failure. The SRNC sends a RADIO BEARER SETUP message to the UE. The RAB is set up. Figure 5-12 Unsuccessful RAB setup procedure The procedure shown in Figure 5-12 is described as follows: 1. 9. Triggering Conditions A call ends and the calling party hangs up. The NodeB and the SRNC perform synchronization by exchanging uplink and downlink synchronization frames in the DCH frame protocol.. the UE sends a RADIO BEARER SETUP COMPLETE message to the SRNC. 4. Failing to Set Up an RAB Figure 5-12 shows the unsuccessful RAB setup procedure. The NodeB allocates the associated resources and then sends a RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATION READY message to the SRNC. 6. The SRNC sends an RAB ASSIGNMENT RESPONSE message to the CN. The SRNC sends a RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATION PREPARE message to the NodeB. requesting the NodeB to prepare for adding one or more DCHs to the existing radio links for carrying the RAB. 2.

7. The SRNC transparently sends the contents of the UPLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message to the CN through a DIRECT TRANSFER message. The UE sends an UPLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message to the SRNC. The UE sends an UPLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message to the SRNC. The CN sends an IU RELEASE COMMAND message to the SRNC to request call release on the Iu interface. 5. 5. The message indicates RELEASE to request release of the call. 4. The SRNC transparently sends the contents of the UPLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message to the CN through a DIRECT TRANSFER message. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The message indicates the reason for the Iu release. applicable to the ATM-based Iu-CS interface only) The ALCAP protocol on the Iu interface initiates an Iu data transport bearer release procedure. 8.5. Figure 5-13 Call release procedure (outgoing call) The procedure shown in Figure 5-13 is described as follows: 1. The CN sends a DIRECT TRANSFER message to the SRNC.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 5 Outgoing Call Procedure Procedure Figure 5-13 shows the call release procedure. 6. This content informs the CN that the UE has hanged up. (Optional.. indicating DISCONNECT. 3. indicating RELEASE COMPLETE. The SRNC sends an IU RELEASE COMPLETE message to the CN. Ltd. The SRNC transparently sends the contents of the DIRECT TRANSFER message to the UE through a DOWNLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message. 9. 2. 5-17 .7 RRC Connection Release Procedure The RRC connection release procedure is performed to release the signaling connection and all radio bearers between the UE and the UTRAN.

5-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. NOTE The SRNC may send the RRC CONNECTION RELEASE message several times to increase the probability of proper reception of the message by the UE. Ltd. If a radio bearer fails to be set up. the SRNC judges that the UE has released the RRC connection. the SRNC initiates an RRC connection release procedure. Figure 5-14 RRC connection release procedure (from a DCH) The procedure shown in Figure 5-14 is described as follows: 1. The RRC SNs of these messages are the same. If judging that the RRC connection does not carry any other RAB of the UE. the RRC connection on the DCH is released. the SRNC judges whether the RRC connection carries any other RAB of the UE. NOTE If an RRC connection needs to be released after a successful outgoing call.5 Outgoing Call Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Triggering Conditions After an RAB is released. Procedure Based on the resource occupied by the RRC connection. The SRNC sends an RRC CONNECTION RELEASE message to the UE through the DCCH. The number of retransmissions and the transmission intervals are determined by the SRNC.. I. Releasing an RRC Connection from a DCH Figure 5-14 shows the procedure for releasing an RRC connection from a DCH. the RRC connection on the CCH is released. there are two types of RRC connection release procedure: release of an RRC connection from a DCH and release of an RRC connection from a CCH. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . If the SRNC does not receive an RRC CONNECTION RELEASE COMPLETE message from the UE after sending the RRC CONNECTION RELEASE message for four times.

. The UE sends an RRC CONNECTION RELEASE COMPLETE message to the SRNC. 5-19 . Releasing an RRC Connection from a CCH Figure 5-15 shows the procedure for releasing an RRC connection from a CCH. 4. (Optional. 3. requesting the NodeB to delete the radio link resources in the NodeB. The UE sends an RRC CONNECTION RELEASE COMPLETE message to the SRNC. Ltd. the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK DELETION RESPONSE message to the SRNC. required for the ATM-based Iub interface only) The SRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to initiate an Iub user plane transport bearer release procedure. II. Figure 5-15 RRC connection release procedure (from a CCH) The procedure shown in Figure 5-15 is described as follows: 1. The SRNC sends a RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST message to the NodeB.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 5 Outgoing Call Procedure 2. 5. The SRNC sends an RRC CONNECTION RELEASE message to the UE through the CCCH. Then. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 2. After releasing the resources. the RRC connection release procedure ends.

.

refer to the elementary procedures. 6. This topic describes incoming call setup and release in terms of protocols. Ltd. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and signaling in normal and abnormal conditions. triggering conditions. triggering conditions.1 Protocols Related to an Incoming Call The incoming call procedure complies with some 3GPP TS25 protocols. 6.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Incoming Call Procedure The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure of an incoming call. 6-1 .. signaling procedure of a successful incoming call.5 Elementary Procedures of an Incoming Call This describes the elementary procedures of an incoming call in terms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions. 6.2 Triggering Conditions of an Incoming Call An incoming call is received by a UE when a mobile phone or fixed-line phone calls the UE. and signaling tracing on the RNC LMT.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Incoming Call This describes the signaling procedure of a successful incoming call. 6. For the messages related to incoming call failures. the network calls a UE and the UE responds to the paging.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 6 Incoming Call Procedure 6 About This Chapter Incoming Call Procedure In the incoming call procedure. This topic also describes the elementary procedures in terms of functions. 6.

. The compliance protocols are as follows: l l l 3GPP TS25. 6-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.6 Incoming Call Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 6. the triggering condition is that a network pages a UE that camps on a cell.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Incoming Call This describes the signaling procedure of a successful incoming call. For the messages related to incoming call failures.331 "Radio Resource Control (RRC)" 3GPP TS25. Therefore. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . refer to the elementary procedures. Figure 6-1 shows the signaling procedure of a successful incoming call.1 Protocols Related to an Incoming Call The incoming call procedure complies with some 3GPP TS25 protocols.2 Triggering Conditions of an Incoming Call An incoming call is received by a UE when a mobile phone or fixed-line phone calls the UE. Ltd.413 "UTRAN Iu interface RANAP signalling" 3GPP TS25. 6.433 "UTRAN Iub interface Node B Application Part (NBAP) signalling" 6.

6-3 .RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 6 Incoming Call Procedure Figure 6-1 Signaling procedure of a successful incoming call Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd..

This procedure takes the RRC connection set up on the DCH as an example.6 Incoming Call Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Note the following information about the procedure shown in Figure 6-1: l The RRC connection can be set up on a DCH or a CCH. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) .4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Incoming Call Procedure The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure of an incoming call. no ALCAP procedure is performed on the Iub interface after radio links are set up. Prerequisite l l The RNC LMT works properly. reconfigured. Ltd.. Context Table 6-1 lists the messages to be traced. If IP transport is applied to the Iub interface. You are logged in to the RNC as a user authorized to perform tracing management. Table 6-1 Messages to be traced Interface and Protocol to Be Traced Message Name on the LMT RRC_PAGING_TYPE1 RRC_PAGING_TYPE2 RRC_RRC_CONNECT_REQ RRC_RRC_CONN_SETUP RRC_RRC_CONN_REJ Uu RRC_RRC_CONNECT_SET UP_CMP RRC_INIT_DIRECT_TRANS F RRC_DL_DIRECT_TRANSF RRC_UL_DIR_TRANSF RRC_SECURITY_MODE_C MD 6-4 Message Name in Protocols PAGING TYPE 1 PAGING TYPE 2 RRC CONNECTION REQUEST RRC CONNECTION SETUP RRC CONNECTION REJECT RRC CONNECTION SETUP COMPLETE INITIAL DIRECT TRANSFER DOWNLINK DIRECT TRANSFER UPLINK DIRECT TRANSFER SECURITY MODE COMMAND Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l l 6. no ALCAP procedure is performed on the Iu-CS interface after an RAB is set up or a call is released. If IP transport is applied to the Iu-CS interface. or deleted.

RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 6 Incoming Call Procedure Interface and Protocol to Be Traced Message Name on the LMT RRC_SECURITY_MODE_C MP RRC_SECURITY_MODE_F AIL RRC_RB_SETUP RRC_RB_SETUP_CMP RRC_RB_SETUP_FAIL RRC_RRC_CONN_REL RRC_RRC_CONN_REL_CM P NBAP_RL_SETUP_REQ NBAP_RL_SETUP_RSP NBAP_RL_SETUP_FAIL NBAP_RL_RESTORE_IND NBAP_RL_RECFG_PREP NBAP_RL_RECFG_REDAY Message Name in Protocols SECURITY MODE COMPLETE SECURITY MODE FAILURE RADIO BEARER SETUP RADIO BEARER SETUP COMPLETE RADIO BEARER SETUP FAILURE RRC CONNECTION RELEASE RRC CONNECTION RELEASE COMPLETE RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST RADIO LINK SETUP RESPONSE RADIO LINK SETUP FAILURE RADIO LINK RESTORE INDICATION RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATION PREPARE RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATION READY RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATION FAILURE RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATION COMMIT RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATION CANCEL RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST RADIO LINK DELETION RESPONSE PAGING INITIAL UE MESSAGE COMMON ID DIRECT TRANSFER Iub NBAP_RL_RECFG_FAIL NBAP_RL_RECFG_COMMI T NBAP_RL_RECFG_CANCE L NBAP_RL_DEL_REQ NBAP_RL_DEL_RSP RANAP_PAGING RANAP_INITIAL_UE_MES SAGE RANAP_COMMON_ID RANAP_DIRECT_TRANSFE R Iu Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. 6-5 . Ltd.

. Ltd. Figure 6-2 shows an example of Uu signaling tracing result. multiple RRC_UL_DIR_TRANSF messages and RRC_DL_DIRECT_TRANSF messages are traced. 6-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. That is because the UE and the RNC exchange signaling several times during the incoming call procedure. and so do the RRC_DL_DIRECT_TRANSF messages. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) .6 Incoming Call Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Interface and Protocol to Be Traced Message Name on the LMT RANAP_SECURITY_MODE _COMMAND RANAP_SECURITY_MODE _COMPLETE RANAP_SECURITY_MODE _REJ RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMEN T_REQ RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMEN T_RESP RANAP_IU_RELEASE_CO MMAND RANAP_IU_RELEASE_CO MPLETE Message Name in Protocols SECURITY MODE COMMAND SECURITY MODE COMPLETE SECURITY MODE REJECT RAB ASSIGNMENT REQUEST RAB ASSIGNMENT RESPONSE IU RELEASE COMMAND IU RELEASE COMPLETE Procedure Step 1 Create a Uu tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task. The RRC_UL_DIR_TRANSF messages have different contents. Figure 6-2 Example of Uu signaling tracing result As shown in Figure 6-2.

Figure 6-4 shows an example of Iu signaling tracing result. multiple RANAP_DIRECT_TRANSFER messages are traced. Figure 6-3 shows an example of Iub signaling tracing result. That is because the RNC and the CN exchange signaling several times during the incoming call procedure.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 6 Incoming Call Procedure Step 2 Create an Iub tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task. Ltd. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Figure 6-4 Example of Iu signaling tracing result As shown in Figure 6-4. The RANAP_DIRECT_TRANSFER messages have different contents. ----End 6. Figure 6-3 Example of Iub signaling tracing result Step 3 Create an Iu tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.5 Elementary Procedures of an Incoming Call This describes the elementary procedures of an incoming call in terms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions. 6-7 .

6.2 RRC Connection Setup Procedure The RRC connection setup procedure is performed for the UE to set up a signaling connection to the SRNC. RRC connection setup is always initiated by the UE. Procedure I. One UE has a maximum of one RRC connection at a time.5 Call Setup Procedure (Incoming Call) The call setup procedure is performed to set up a call.5. Ltd. The NAS information is related to authentication.5.7 Call Release Procedure (Incoming Call) The call release procedure is performed to release services and resources after a call ends. Figure 6-5 Paging procedure (for a UE that is in idle mode or in PCH state) 6-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 6. 6.1 Paging Procedure The paging procedure is performed when the CN calls a UE. 6.6 Incoming Call Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 6.. connection setup. Paging a UE that Is in Idle Mode or in PCH State Figure 6-5 shows the procedure for paging a UE that is in idle mode or in PCH state.5.5.5. 6.1 Paging Procedure The paging procedure is performed when the CN calls a UE.3 Signaling Connection Setup Procedure (Incoming Call) The signaling connection setup procedure is performed to exchange the NAS information between the UE and the CN. 6. service request.8 RRC Connection Release Procedure The RRC connection release procedure is performed to release the signaling connection and all radio bearers between the UE and the UTRAN.4 Authentication and Security Mode Control Procedure The authentication and security mode control procedure is performed for the UE and the network to implement bi-directional authentication and to negotiate and configure the integrity protection algorithm and ciphering algorithm.5.5. and so on. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) .5. 6. This procedure ensures integrity and correctness of signaling.5.6 RAB Setup Procedure The RAB setup procedure is performed to set up a user plane bearer. 6. Triggering Conditions A terminal calls the UE.

NOTE The paging occasion is related to the International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) of the UE. 6.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 6 Incoming Call Procedure The procedure shown in Figure 6-5 is described as follows: 1. One UE has a maximum of one RRC connection at a time. RRC connection setup is always initiated by the UE. and then reports to the NAS the information such as the paging cause and the paging record type identifier.5. reads it. II. 6-9 . Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The paging procedure ends. The CN sends a PAGING message to the SRNC. 3. Ltd. 3. The paging procedure ends.2 RRC Connection Setup Procedure The RRC connection setup procedure is performed for the UE to set up a signaling connection to the SRNC. The UE receives the PAGNG TPYE 2 message. The SRNC initiates the paging procedure by sending a PAGING TYPE 1 message to the UE through the Paging Control Channel (PCCH) on an appropriate occasion. The UTRAN may page the same UE on several occasions to increase the probability of proper reception of the paging message by the UE. The UE in idle mode or in PCH state monitors the paging and receives the paging message from the network layer. Figure 6-6 Paging procedure (for a UE that is in CELL_DCH or CELL_FACH state) The procedure shown in Figure 6-6 is described as follows: 1. 2. The CN sends a PAGING message to the SRNC.. The SRNC initiates the paging procedure by sending a PAGING TYPE 2 message to the UE through the DCCH. Paging a UE that Is in CELL_DCH or CELL_FACH State Figure 6-6 shows the procedure for paging a UE that is in CELL_DCH or CELL_FACH state. 2. Triggering Conditions The UE in idle mode initiates the RRC connection setup procedure when the NAS of the UE requests the establishment of a signaling connection.

an RRC connection is set up on the DCH. The SRNC sends an RRC CONNECTION SETUP message to the UE through the downlink CCCH. 4. 6. 5. Then the SRNC sends a RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message to the NodeB. The message contains the information about the DCH allocated by the SRNC. The SRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to set up the Iub user plane transport bearer and performs the synchronization between the SRNC and the NodeB. Typically. 2. Figure 6-7 RRC connection setup procedure on a DCH The procedure shown in Figure 6-7 is described as follows: 1. requesting the NodeB to allocate the specific radio link resources required for an RRC connection. requesting the establishment of an RRC connection. the Radio Resource Management (RRM) module of the RNC determines whether to accept or reject the RRC connection request. The NodeB responds with a RADIO LINK SETUP RESPONSE message to the SRNC after successfully preparing the resources. The UE sends an RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message to the SRNC through the uplink CCCH. It is required for the ATM-based Iub interface only.6 Incoming Call Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Procedure When the SRNC receives an RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message from the UE. based on a specific algorithm. radio resources. This procedure is optional.. 3. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . Ltd. Based on the cause in the RRC connection request and the system resource status. and L1 and L2 resources. If accepting the request. 6-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The UE sends an RRC CONNECTION SETUP COMPLETE message to the SRNC through the uplink Dedicated Control Channel (DCCH) that is just set up. The message indicates that the RRC connection setup procedure ends. Figure 6-7 shows the procedure for setting up an RRC connection on a DCH. the SRNC determines to set up the RRC connection on a DCH and allocates the Radio Network Temporary Identity (RNTI). the RRM module further determines whether to set up the RRC connection on a Dedicated Channel (DCH) or on a Common Channel (CCH). Figure 6-8 shows the procedure for setting up an RRC connection on a CCH. based on a specific RRM algorithm.

Ltd. Based on the cause in the RRC connection request and the system resource status. The SRNC then sends an RRC CONNECTION SETUP message to the UE through the downlink CCCH. 3. 2. The UE sends an RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message to the SRNC through the uplink CCCH. The message indicates the reason for rejecting the RRC connection request. The UE sends an RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message to the SRNC through the uplink CCCH. The SRNC maps the logical channel of the UE onto a specific CCH in the cell. 6-11 Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . the SRNC sends an RRC CONNECTION REJECT message to the UE. Figure 6-9 RRC connection rejected procedure The procedure shown in Figure 6-9 is described as follows: 1. The message indicates that the RRC connection setup procedure ends. requesting the establishment of an RRC connection. Then. The UE sends an RRC CONNECTION SETUP COMPLETE message to the SRNC through the uplink CCCH.. requesting the establishment of an RRC connection. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 6 Incoming Call Procedure Figure 6-8 RRC connection setup procedure on a CCH The procedure shown in Figure 6-8 is described as follows: 1. Figure 6-9 shows the RRC connection rejected procedure. The SRNC determines to reject the RRC connection request. the SRNC determines to set up the RRC connection on a CCH. 2. The message contains the information about the CCH. based on a specific algorithm.

The UE sends an INITIAL DIRECT TRANSFER message to the SRNC through the RRC connection. Triggering Conditions The UE sends a direct transfer message to initiate the signaling connection setup procedure. If accepting the request. Figure 6-10 Signaling connection setup procedure The procedure shown in Figure 6-10 is described as follows: 1. The INITIAL UE MESSAGE contains the NAS information to be sent to the CN by the UE.6 Incoming Call Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 6. Ltd. If rejecting the request. After receiving the message. After receiving the message. The message indicates that the SCCP connection is set up. the CN sends a CONNECTION REJECT (CJ) message to the SRNC. and so on. The NAS information is related to authentication. 3. The content of the NAS information is PAGING RESPONSE. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . the SRNC confirms that the signaling connection is set up. connection setup. The SRNC receives the INITIAL DIRECT TRANSFER message from the UE and sends an INITIAL UE MESSAGE to the CN through the Iu interface. service request.5. l 6-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. the CN sends a CONNECTION CONFIRM (CC) message to the SRNC. the SRNC confirms that the signaling connection fails to be set up and then initiates the RRC release procedure. The message indicates that the SCCP connection fails to be set up. l 2. The CN sends a response message to the SRNC.3 Signaling Connection Setup Procedure (Incoming Call) The signaling connection setup procedure is performed to exchange the NAS information between the UE and the CN. Procedure Figure 6-10 shows the signaling connection setup procedure. The message contains the initial NAS information to be sent to the CN by the UE.

Triggering Conditions The UE and the CN exchange signaling.5. This procedure ensures integrity and correctness of signaling. The message indicates AUTHENTICATION REQUEST. 6-13 Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . Ltd. 2. 3. The network initiates the authentication and security mode control procedure. indicating AUTHENTICATION Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The CN sends a DIRECT TRANSFER message to the SRNC. The SRNC transparently sends the contents of the DIRECT TRANSFER message to the UE through a DOWNLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message. Figure 6-11 Authentication and security mode control procedure The procedure shown in Figure 6-11 is described as follows: 1..4 Authentication and Security Mode Control Procedure The authentication and security mode control procedure is performed for the UE and the network to implement bi-directional authentication and to negotiate and configure the integrity protection algorithm and ciphering algorithm. Procedure Figure 6-11 shows the authentication and security mode control procedure.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 6 Incoming Call Procedure 6. 4. The UE sends an UPLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message to the SRNC. The SRNC transparently sends the contents of the UPLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message to the CN through a DIRECT TRANSFER message.

6 Incoming Call Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide RESPONSE. If the integrity protection and ciphering algorithms are configured successfully. the UE sends a SECURITY MODE COMMAND COMPLETE message to the SRNC. The CN sends a SECURITY MODE COMMAND message to the SRNC to initiate the security mode control procedure. Triggering Conditions A UE receives a call from the CN. 5. the UE sends a SECURITY MODE COMMAND FAILURE message to the SRNC.. the UE returns a message with an XRES IE. l 6. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) .5 Call Setup Procedure (Incoming Call) The call setup procedure is performed to set up a call. If the UMTS Subscriber Identity Module (USIM) judges that the authentication is successful. 6-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The message contains the information about the supported ciphering and integrity protection algorithms. The message contains the information about the integrity protection and ciphering algorithms that the UE uses. The SRNC then sends a SECURITY MODE COMMAND COMPLETE message to the CN.5. 7. The UE sends a response message to the SRNC. Ltd. l 6. The SRNC then sends a SECURITY MODE COMMAND REJECT message to the CN. The SRNC sends a SECURITY MODE COMMAND message to the UE to inform the UE of the integrity protection and ciphering algorithms that the UTRAN selects. If the UE does not support the integrity protection and ciphering algorithms. The message contains the error information and the reason for the failure. Procedure Figure 6-12 shows the call setup procedure.

The UE sends an UPLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message to the SRNC. 2.. indicating ALERTING to request the called terminal to ring. The UE sends an UPLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message to the SRNC.6 RAB Setup Procedure. The SRNC transparently sends the contents of the DIRECT TRANSFER message to the UE through a DOWNLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message. The SRNC transparently sends the contents of the UPLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message to the CN through a DIRECT TRANSFER message.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 6 Incoming Call Procedure Figure 6-12 Call setup procedure (incoming call) The procedure shown in Figure 6-12 is described as follows: 1. 4. 9. The CN sends a DIRECT TRANSFER message to the SRNC. An RAB is set up. 3. This means that the called party has answered the call.5. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 7. The CN sends a DIRECT TRANSFER message to the SRNC. 6. The message indicates CONNECT ACKNOWLEDGE. 5. The message indicates SETUP and contains the number of the calling party and the bearer capability of the call. indicating CONNECT. For details. The SRNC transparently sends the contents of the UPLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message to the CN through a DIRECT TRANSFER message. 8. 10. Ltd. The DIRECT TRANSFER message indicates CALL CONFIRM and contains the information about the negotiated bearer capability of the call. 6-15 . refer to 6. The UE sends an UPLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message to the SRNC. The SRNC transparently sends the contents of the UPLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message to the CN through a DIRECT TRANSFER message.

6 Incoming Call Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 11.5. Ltd. 6-16 . Based on the AAL2 link characteristic parameters. applicable to the ATM-based Iu-CS interface only) The SRNC maps the Quality of Service (QoS) parameters for the RAB to the AAL2 link characteristic parameters and radio resource characteristic parameters. requesting the NodeB to prepare for adding one or more DCHs to the existing radio links for carrying the RAB. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Procedure I. 6. Setting Up an RAB Successfully Figure 6-13 shows the successful RAB setup procedure. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) 3. (Optional. The SRNC transparently sends the contents of the DIRECT TRANSFER message to the UE through a DOWNLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message. Triggering Conditions A call is set up. The CN sends an RAB ASSIGNMENT REQUEST message to the SRNC to initiate the RAB setup procedure. 2. The SRNC sends a RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATION PREPARE message to the NodeB. Figure 6-13 Successful RAB setup procedure The procedure shown in Figure 6-13 is described as follows: 1.6 RAB Setup Procedure The RAB setup procedure is performed to set up a user plane bearer. the ALCAP on the Iu interface initiates an Iu user plane transport bearer setup procedure..

RAN Signalling Analysis Guide

6 Incoming Call Procedure

4. 5.

The NodeB allocates the associated resources and then sends a RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATION READY message to the SRNC. (Optional; required for the ATM-based Iub interface only) The Iub ALCAP at the SRNC initiates an Iub user plane transport bearer setup procedure. The NodeB and the SRNC perform synchronization by exchanging uplink and downlink synchronization frames in the DCH frame protocol. The SRNC sends a RADIO BEARER SETUP message to the UE. The SRNC sends a RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATION COMMIT message to the NodeB. After performing the radio bearer setup, the UE sends a RADIO BEARER SETUP COMPLETE message to the SRNC. The SRNC sends an RAB ASSIGNMENT RESPONSE message to the CN. The RAB is set up.

6. 7. 8. 9.

II. Failing to Set Up an RAB Figure 6-14 shows the unsuccessful RAB setup procedure. Figure 6-14 Unsuccessful RAB setup procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 6-14 is described as follows: 1. 2. The CN sends an RAB ASSIGNMENT REQUEST message to the SRNC to initiate the RAB setup procedure. The SRNC sends an RAB ASSIGNMENT RESPONSE message to the CN. The message indicates the ID of the RAB that fails to be set up and the reason for the failure.

6.5.7 Call Release Procedure (Incoming Call)
The call release procedure is performed to release services and resources after a call ends.

Triggering Conditions
A call ends and the calling party hangs up.
Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6-17

6 Incoming Call Procedure

RAN Signalling Analysis Guide

Procedure
Figure 6-15 shows the call release procedure. Figure 6-15 Call release procedure (incoming call)

The procedure shown in Figure 6-15 is described as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. The CN sends a DIRECT TRANSFER message to the SRNC. The message indicates DISCONNECT to inform the UE that the calling party has hanged up. The SRNC transparently sends the contents of the DIRECT TRANSFER message to the UE through a DOWNLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message. The UE sends an UPLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message to the SRNC. The SRNC transparently sends the contents of the UPLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message to the CN through a DIRECT TRANSFER message. The DIRECT TRANSFER message indicates RELEASE which requests release of the call. The CN sends a DIRECT TRANSFER message to the SRNC. The message indicates RELEASE COMPLETE. The SRNC transparently sends the contents of the DIRECT TRANSFER message to the UE through a DOWNLINK DIRECT TRANSFER message. The CN sends an IU RELEASE COMMAND message to the SRNC to request call release on the Iu interface. The message indicates the reason for the Iu release. (Optional; applicable to the ATM-based Iu-CS interface only) The ALCAP protocol on the Iu interface initiates an Iu data transport bearer release procedure. The SRNC sends an IU RELEASE COMPLETE message to the CN.

5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

6-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

RAN Signalling Analysis Guide

6 Incoming Call Procedure

6.5.8 RRC Connection Release Procedure
The RRC connection release procedure is performed to release the signaling connection and all radio bearers between the UE and the UTRAN.

Triggering Conditions
After an RAB is released, the SRNC judges whether the RRC connection carries any other RAB of the UE. If judging that the RRC connection does not carry any other RAB of the UE, the SRNC initiates an RRC connection release procedure.

Procedure
Based on the resource occupied by the RRC connection, there are two types of RRC connection release procedure: release of an RRC connection from a DCH and release of an RRC connection from a CCH.
NOTE

If an RRC connection needs to be released after a successful outgoing call, the RRC connection on the DCH is released. If a radio bearer fails to be set up, the RRC connection on the CCH is released.

I. Releasing an RRC Connection from a DCH Figure 6-16 shows the procedure for releasing an RRC connection from a DCH. Figure 6-16 RRC connection release procedure (from a DCH)

The procedure shown in Figure 6-16 is described as follows: 1. The SRNC sends an RRC CONNECTION RELEASE message to the UE through the DCCH.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6-19

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

6 Incoming Call Procedure
NOTE

RAN Signalling Analysis Guide

The SRNC may send the RRC CONNECTION RELEASE message several times to increase the probability of proper reception of the message by the UE. The RRC SNs of these messages are the same. The number of retransmissions and the transmission intervals are determined by the SRNC. If the SRNC does not receive an RRC CONNECTION RELEASE COMPLETE message from the UE after sending the RRC CONNECTION RELEASE message for four times, the SRNC judges that the UE has released the RRC connection.

2. 3. 4. 5.

The UE sends an RRC CONNECTION RELEASE COMPLETE message to the SRNC. The SRNC sends a RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST message to the NodeB, requesting the NodeB to delete the radio link resources in the NodeB. After releasing the resources, the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK DELETION RESPONSE message to the SRNC. (Optional; required for the ATM-based Iub interface only) The SRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to initiate an Iub user plane transport bearer release procedure. Then, the RRC connection release procedure ends.

II. Releasing an RRC Connection from a CCH Figure 6-17 shows the procedure for releasing an RRC connection from a CCH. Figure 6-17 RRC connection release procedure (from a CCH)

The procedure shown in Figure 6-17 is described as follows: 1. 2. The SRNC sends an RRC CONNECTION RELEASE message to the UE through the CCCH. The UE sends an RRC CONNECTION RELEASE COMPLETE message to the SRNC.

6-20

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

RAN Signalling Analysis Guide

7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure

7

Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure

About This Chapter
The intra-frequency handover procedure is performed to hand over a UE from the WCDMA cell that it camps on to an intra-frequency WCDMA cell. This topic describes intra-frequency handover in terms of types, protocols, triggering conditions, signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency handover, and signaling tracing on the RNC LMT. This topic also describes the elementary procedures in terms of functions, triggering conditions, and signaling in normal and abnormal conditions. 7.1 Types of Intra-Frequency Handover Based on the connections between the UE and the network during the handover, intra-frequency handovers are categorized into two types: intra-frequency soft handover and intra-frequency hard handover. 7.2 Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Within a NodeB The procedure of intra-frequency soft handover within a NodeB is performed to hand over a UE from a cell to an intra-frequency cell that is controlled by the same NodeB. 7.3 Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC The procedure of intra-frequency soft handover between NodeBs in an RNC is performed to hand over a UE from a cell to an intra-frequency cell that is controlled by another NodeB in the same RNC. 7.4 Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between RNCs The procedure of intra-frequency soft handover between RNCs is performed to hand over a UE from a cell to an intra-frequency cell that is controlled by another RNC. 7.5 Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC The procedure of intra-frequency hard handover between NodeBs in an RNC is performed to hand over a UE from a cell to an intra-frequency cell that is controlled by another NodeB in the same RNC. 7.6 Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between RNCs The procedure of intra-frequency hard handover between RNCs is performed to hand over a UE from a cell to an intra-frequency cell that is controlled by another RNC.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-1

2.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Within a NodeB The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure of an intra-frequency soft handover within a NodeB. 7. 7. Table 7-1 Types of intra-frequency handover Type Subtype Intra-frequency soft handover within a NodeB. 7. the UE disconnects from the source cell before setting up a connection towards the target cell. refer to the elementary procedures.7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 7.2. 7. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . Ltd. Intrafrequency soft handover 7. 7. a handover between two RNCs where no Iur interface exists.2.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Within a NodeB This describes the signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency soft handover within a NodeB.2.2 Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Within a NodeB The procedure of intra-frequency soft handover within a NodeB is performed to hand over a UE from a cell to an intra-frequency cell that is controlled by the same NodeB..5 Elementary Procedures of Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Within a NodeB This describes the elementary procedures of intra-frequency soft handover within a NodeB in terms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions. intra-frequency handovers are categorized into two types: intra-frequency soft handover and intra-frequency hard handover. 7-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. for example. that is. and intra-frequency hard handover is applied only in special scenarios. During an intra-frequency hard handover.2.1 Protocols Related to Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Within a NodeB The procedure of intra-frequency soft handover within a NodeB complies with some 3GPP TS25 protocols. the UE sets up a connection to the target cell before disconnecting from the source cell.2 Triggering Conditions of Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Within a NodeB Intra-frequency soft handover within a NodeB is the intra-frequency soft handover where the source and target cells are controlled by the same NodeB. softer handover Intra-frequency soft handover between NodeBs in an RNC Intra-frequency soft handover between RNCs Intrafrequency hard handover Intra-frequency hard handover between NodeBs in an RNC Intra-frequency hard handover between RNCs Description During an intra-frequency soft handover.1 Types of Intra-Frequency Handover Based on the connections between the UE and the network during the handover. Table 7-1 lists the types of intra-frequency handover. For the messages related to handover failures. Intra-frequency soft handover is common.

2. 7-3 . refer to the elementary procedures.2 Triggering Conditions of Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Within a NodeB Intra-frequency soft handover within a NodeB is the intra-frequency soft handover where the source and target cells are controlled by the same NodeB. The compliance protocols are as follows: l l 3GPP TS25.331 "Radio Resource Control (RRC)" 3GPP TS25.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Within a NodeB This describes the signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency soft handover within a NodeB. 7.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure 7. Figure 7-1 Signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency soft handover within a NodeB Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.2. The handover is triggered when the signal quality of the serving cell is degraded or the load of the serving cell is heavy. For the messages related to handover failures.1 Protocols Related to Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Within a NodeB The procedure of intra-frequency soft handover within a NodeB complies with some 3GPP TS25 protocols.. Figure 7-1 shows the signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency soft handover within a NodeB.2.433 "UTRAN Iub interface Node B Application Part (NBAP) signalling" 7. Ltd.

. Context Table 7-2 lists the messages to be traced.2. You are logged in to the RNC as a user authorized to perform tracing management.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Within a NodeB The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure of an intra-frequency soft handover within a NodeB. Table 7-2 Messages to be traced Interface and Protocol to Be Traced Message Name on the LMT RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDAT E Uu RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDAT E_CMP RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDAT E_FAIL NBAP_RL_ADD_REQ NBAP_RL_ADD_RSP Iub NBAP_RL_ADD_FAIL NBAP_RL_DEL_REQ NBAP_RL_DEL_RSP Message Name in Protocols ACTIVE SET UPDATE ACTIVE SET UPDATE COMPLETE ACTIVE SET UPDATE FAILURE RADIO LINK ADDITION REQUEST RADIO LINK ADDITION RESPONSE RADIO LINK ADDITION FAILURE RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST RADIO LINK DELETION RESPONSE Procedure Step 1 Create a Uu tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task. Ltd. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . Figure 7-2 shows an example of Uu signaling tracing result. Figure 7-2 Example of Uu signaling tracing result 7-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 7. Prerequisite l l The RNC LMT works properly.

Triggering Conditions The CRNC sends a RADIO LINK ADDITION REQUEST message.5 Elementary Procedures of Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Within a NodeB This describes the elementary procedures of intra-frequency soft handover within a NodeB in terms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions.2. 7.2 Active Set Update Procedure The active set update procedure is performed to update the active set of radio links between the UE and the UTRAN.2. Figure 7-3 shows an example of Iub signaling tracing result.2.2. 7-5 .5. Procedure Figure 7-4 shows the radio link addition procedure. Radio Link Addition Procedure The radio link addition procedure is performed to add one or more radio links towards a UE.3 Radio Link Deletion Procedure The radio link deletion procedure is performed to release resources in a NodeB for one or more established radio links towards a UE. Figure 7-3 Example of Iub signaling tracing result ----End 7.. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 7.1 Radio Link Addition Procedure The radio link addition procedure is performed to add one or more radio links towards a UE.5.5. 7. Ltd.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure Step 2 Create an Iub tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.

l Active Set Update Procedure The active set update procedure is performed to update the active set of radio links between the UE and the UTRAN. the NodeB saves the value of the Configuration Generation ID IE contained in the RADIO LINK ADDITION REQUEST message and sends a RADIO LINK ADDITION RESPONSE message. Ltd.7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Figure 7-4 Radio link addition procedure The procedure shown in Figure 7-4 is described as follows: 1. After receiving the message. 7-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Triggering Conditions The active set update procedure can be triggered in either of the following conditions: l l Radio link addition Radio link deletion Procedure Figure 7-5 shows the active set update procedure. The message contains the failure cause in the Cause IE. The CRNC sends a RADIO LINK ADDITION REQUEST message to the NodeB. the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK ADDITION FAILURE message. the NodeB reserves the necessary resources and configures the new radio link or links according to the parameters given in the message.. The NodeB sends a response message to the CRNC. If any radio link fails to be added. l 2. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . If all the requested radio links are added.

The SRNC sends an ACTIVE SET UPDATE message to the UE. 3. the message indicates radio link deletion. If the ACTIVE SET UPDATE message contains the configuration not supported by the UE or if the active set does not contain the radio links specified by the Radio Link Removal Information IE. If a radio link needs to be deleted. the message indicates radio link addition.. l 2. the UE sends an ACTIVE SET UPDATE COMPLETE message on the DCCH by using Acknowledged Mode (AM) Radio Link Control (RLC). Procedure Figure 7-6 shows the radio link deletion procedure. The UE adds or deletes the radio links according to the Radio Link Addition Information or Radio Link Removal Information IE contained in the ACTIVE SET UPDATE message.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure Figure 7-5 Active set update procedure The procedure shown in Figure 7-5 is described as follows: 1. l Radio Link Deletion Procedure The radio link deletion procedure is performed to release resources in a NodeB for one or more established radio links towards a UE. Triggering Conditions The CRNC sends a RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST message. Ltd. If a radio link needs to be added. 7-7 . the UE sends an ACTIVE SET UPDATE FAILURE message. The UE sends a response message to the SRNC. If adding or deleting the radio links successfully. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC This describes the signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency soft handover between NodeBs in an RNC. After receiving the message.3. The CRNC sends a RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST message to the NodeB.. the NodeB deletes the radio links specified by the message.3.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC 7-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 7.7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Figure 7-6 Radio link deletion procedure The procedure shown in Figure 7-6 is described as follows: 1. refer to the elementary procedures. l 7.3. the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK DELETION RESPONSE message. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . Ltd. 7. The Criticality Diagnostics field in the message indicates the failure cause.2 Triggering Conditions of Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC Intra-frequency soft handover between NodeBs in an RNC is the intra-frequency soft handover where the source and target cells are controlled by different NodeBs in an RNC.3 Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC The procedure of intra-frequency soft handover between NodeBs in an RNC is performed to hand over a UE from a cell to an intra-frequency cell that is controlled by another NodeB in the same RNC. l If all the radio links are deleted.3.1 Protocols Related to Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC The procedure of intra-frequency soft handover between NodeBs in an RNC complies with some 3GPP TS25 protocols and an ITU-T protocol. For the messages related to handover failures. 7. 2. The NodeB sends a response message to the CRNC. the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK DELETION RESPONSE message. If any radio link fails to be deleted. 7.

331 "Radio Resource Control (RRC)" 3GPP TS25. 7. 7-9 .RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure of an intra-frequency soft handover between NodeBs in an RNC. The handover is triggered when the SRNC finds that another cell has higher signal quality than the serving cell or that the load of the serving cell is heavy. For the messages related to handover failures.3.5 Elementary Procedures of Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC This describes the elementary procedures of intra-frequency soft handover between NodeBs in an RNC in terms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions. Figure 7-7 shows the signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency soft handover between NodeBs in an RNC.3. The compliance protocols are as follows: l l l 3GPP TS25.2 Triggering Conditions of Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC Intra-frequency soft handover between NodeBs in an RNC is the intra-frequency soft handover where the source and target cells are controlled by different NodeBs in an RNC. 7.3. refer to the elementary procedures.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC This describes the signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency soft handover between NodeBs in an RNC. Ltd.3.. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.433 "UTRAN Iub interface Node B Application Part (NBAP) signalling" ITU-T Q. 7.2630 "AAL type 2 Signalling Protocol" 7.1 Protocols Related to Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC The procedure of intra-frequency soft handover between NodeBs in an RNC complies with some 3GPP TS25 protocols and an ITU-T protocol.

If IP transport is applied to the Iub interface.7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Figure 7-7 Signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency soft handover between NodeBs in an RNC Note the following information about the procedure shown in Figure 7-7: l l During the handover. You are logged in to the RNC as a user authorized to perform tracing management. Ltd. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . Prerequisite l l The RNC LMT works properly.3. Context Table 7-3 lists the messages to be traced. 7. NodeB 1 is the source NodeB and NodeB 2 is the target NodeB.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure of an intra-frequency soft handover between NodeBs in an RNC.. no ALCAP procedure is performed on the Iub interface after radio links are set up or deleted. 7-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

Ltd. Message Name in Protocols ACTIVE SET UPDATE ACTIVE SET UPDATE COMPLETE ACTIVE SET UPDATE FAILURE RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST RADIO LINK SETUP RESPONSE RADIO LINK SETUP FAILURE RADIO LINK RESTORE INDICATION RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST RADIO LINK DELETION RESPONSE – Procedure Step 1 Create a Uu tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task. Figure 7-9 shows an example of Iub signaling tracing result. Figure 7-8 Example of Uu signaling tracing result Step 2 Create an Iub tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.AAL2 No message name needs to be specified..RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure Table 7-3 Messages to be traced Interface and Protocol to Be Traced Message Name on the LMT RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDAT E Uu RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDAT E_CMP RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDAT E_FAIL NBAP_RL_SETUP_REQ NBAP_RL_SETUP_RSP Iub NBAP_RL_SETUP_FAIL NBAP_RL_RESTORE_IND NBAP_RL_DEL_REQ NBAP_RL_DEL_RSP Q. 7-11 . Figure 7-8 shows an example of Uu signaling tracing result. Figure 7-9 Example of Iub signaling tracing result Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) .5.AAL2 signaling tracing result. 7.3. 7.7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Step 3 Create a Q.5.5. 7. Figure 7-10 shows an example of Q.6 Iub User Plane Release Procedure The Iub user plane release procedure is performed to release data transport bearers from the Iub interface.5 Elementary Procedures of Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC This describes the elementary procedures of intra-frequency soft handover between NodeBs in an RNC in terms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions.3.1 Radio Link Setup Procedure (Intra-RNC Handover or GSM to WCDMA CS Handover) The radio link setup procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover) is performed to set up a radio link in an SRNC-controlled NodeB for a UE.3. Radio Link Setup Procedure (Intra-RNC Handover or GSM to WCDMA CS Handover) The radio link setup procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover) is performed to set up a radio link in an SRNC-controlled NodeB for a UE..5 Radio Link Deletion Procedure The radio link deletion procedure is performed to release resources in a NodeB for one or more established radio links towards a UE. Ltd. 7.4 Active Set Update Procedure The active set update procedure is performed to update the active set of radio links between the UE and the UTRAN. 7.3.3.3 Radio Link Restoration Procedure (Intra-RNC Handover or GSM to WCDMA CS Handover) The radio link restoration procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover) is performed for a NodeB to notify the CRNC that the uplink synchronization of one or more radio links is achieved or re-achieved.5. 7-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 7.AAL2 signaling tracing result ----End 7. Figure 7-10 Example of Q.AAL2 tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.3.5.5.3.2 Iub User Plane Setup Procedure The Iub user plane setup procedure is performed to set up bearers for data transmission on the Iub interface.

If the radio link is set up. The CRNC sends a RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message to the NodeB. Triggering Conditions The Iub user plane setup procedure can be triggered in one of the following conditions: l l The common transport channels are set up. The NodeB sends a response message to the CRNC. After receiving the message.. 7-13 Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . The message contains the failure cause. The dedicated transport channels are set up. Procedure Figure 7-11 shows the radio link setup procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover). the NodeB reserves the necessary resources and configures the new radio link according to the parameters given in the message. Figure 7-11 Radio link setup procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover) The procedure shown in Figure 7-11 is described as follows: 1. l Iub User Plane Setup Procedure The Iub user plane setup procedure is performed to set up bearers for data transmission on the Iub interface. If the radio link fails to be set up. the NodeB saves the value of the Configuration Generation ID IE contained in the RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message and sends a RADIO LINK SETUP RESPONSE message.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure Triggering Conditions The CRNC sends a RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message. l 2. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK SETUP FAILURE message. Ltd.

the NodeB sends a QAAL2 ESTABLISH CONFIRM message. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . Ltd. Procedure Figure 7-13 shows the radio link restoration procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover). 7-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l Radio Link Restoration Procedure (Intra-RNC Handover or GSM to WCDMA CS Handover) The radio link restoration procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover) is performed for a NodeB to notify the CRNC that the uplink synchronization of one or more radio links is achieved or re-achieved. That is. Figure 7-12 Iub user plane setup procedure The procedure shown in Figure 7-12 is described as follows: 1.. the NodeB finishes UL synchronization with the UE. l If the Iub data transport bearers are set up. The NodeB uses the ALCAP protocol to send a response message to the CRNC. 2.7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Procedure Figure 7-12 shows the Iub user plane setup procedure. the NodeB sends a QAAL2 ESTABLISH RELEASE CONFIRM message. If an Iub data transport bearer fails to be set up. The CRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to send a QAAL2 ESTABLISH REQUEST message to the NodeB. Triggering Conditions The NodeB detects UL signals from the UE.

RAN Signalling Analysis Guide

7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure

Figure 7-13 Radio link restoration procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover)

After performing UL synchronization with the UE, the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK RESTORE INDICATION message to the CRNC.

Active Set Update Procedure
The active set update procedure is performed to update the active set of radio links between the UE and the UTRAN.

Triggering Conditions
The active set update procedure can be triggered in either of the following conditions:
l l

Radio link addition Radio link deletion

Procedure
Figure 7-14 shows the active set update procedure. Figure 7-14 Active set update procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 7-14 is described as follows:
Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-15

7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure

RAN Signalling Analysis Guide

1.

The SRNC sends an ACTIVE SET UPDATE message to the UE. If a radio link needs to be added, the message indicates radio link addition. If a radio link needs to be deleted, the message indicates radio link deletion. The UE adds or deletes the radio links according to the Radio Link Addition Information or Radio Link Removal Information IE contained in the ACTIVE SET UPDATE message. The UE sends a response message to the SRNC.
l

2. 3.

If adding or deleting the radio links successfully, the UE sends an ACTIVE SET UPDATE COMPLETE message on the DCCH by using Acknowledged Mode (AM) Radio Link Control (RLC). If the ACTIVE SET UPDATE message contains the configuration not supported by the UE or if the active set does not contain the radio links specified by the Radio Link Removal Information IE, the UE sends an ACTIVE SET UPDATE FAILURE message.

l

Radio Link Deletion Procedure
The radio link deletion procedure is performed to release resources in a NodeB for one or more established radio links towards a UE.

Triggering Conditions
The CRNC sends a RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST message.

Procedure
Figure 7-15 shows the radio link deletion procedure. Figure 7-15 Radio link deletion procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 7-15 is described as follows: 1. 2. The CRNC sends a RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST message to the NodeB. After receiving the message, the NodeB deletes the radio links specified by the message. The NodeB sends a response message to the CRNC.
l

If all the radio links are deleted, the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK DELETION RESPONSE message.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

7-16

RAN Signalling Analysis Guide
l

7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure

If any radio link fails to be deleted, the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK DELETION RESPONSE message. The Criticality Diagnostics field in the message indicates the failure cause.

Iub User Plane Release Procedure
The Iub user plane release procedure is performed to release data transport bearers from the Iub interface.

Triggering Conditions
The transport channels on the Iub user plane need to be removed.

Procedure
Figure 7-16 shows the Iub user plane release procedure. Figure 7-16 Iub user plane release procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 7-16 is described as follows: 1. 2. The CRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to send a QAAL2 RELEASE REQUEST message to the NodeB. The NodeB uses the ALCAP protocol to send a response message to the CRNC.
l

If the Iub data transport bearers are released, the NodeB sends a QAAL2 RELEASE CONFIRM message to confirm the release. If an Iub data transport bearer fails to be released, the NodeB sends a QAAL2 RELEASE CONFIRM message that indicates the failure cause.

l

7.4 Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between RNCs
The procedure of intra-frequency soft handover between RNCs is performed to hand over a UE from a cell to an intra-frequency cell that is controlled by another RNC. 7.4.1 Protocols Related to Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between RNCs
Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-17

7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure

RAN Signalling Analysis Guide

The procedure of intra-frequency soft handover between RNCs complies with some 3GPP TS25 protocols and an ITU-T protocol. 7.4.2 Triggering Conditions of Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between RNCs Intra-frequency soft handover between RNCs is the intra-frequency soft handover where the source and target cells are controlled by different RNCs. 7.4.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between RNCs This describes the signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency soft handover between RNCs. For the messages related to handover failures, refer to the elementary procedures. 7.4.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between RNCs The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure of an intra-frequency soft handover between RNCs. 7.4.5 Elementary Procedures of Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between RNCs This describes the elementary procedures of intra-frequency soft handover between RNCs in terms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions.

7.4.1 Protocols Related to Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between RNCs
The procedure of intra-frequency soft handover between RNCs complies with some 3GPP TS25 protocols and an ITU-T protocol. The compliance protocols are as follows:
l l l l

3GPP TS25.331 "Radio Resource Control (RRC)" 3GPP TS25.423 "UTRAN Iur interface RNSAP signalling" 3GPP TS25.433 "UTRAN Iub interface Node B Application Part (NBAP) signalling" ITU-T Q.2630 "AAL type 2 Signalling Protocol"

7.4.2 Triggering Conditions of Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between RNCs
Intra-frequency soft handover between RNCs is the intra-frequency soft handover where the source and target cells are controlled by different RNCs. The handover is triggered when the SRNC finds that another cell has higher signal quality than the serving cell or that the load of the serving cell is heavy.

7.4.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between RNCs
This describes the signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency soft handover between RNCs. For the messages related to handover failures, refer to the elementary procedures. Figure 7-17 shows the signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency soft handover between RNCs.

7-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

RAN Signalling Analysis Guide

7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure

Figure 7-17 Signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency soft handover between RNCs

Note the following information about the procedure shown in Figure 7-17:
l l

During the handover, NodeB 1 is the source NodeB and NodeB 2 is the target NodeB. If IP transport is applied to the Iub interface, no ALCAP procedure is performed on the Iub interface after radio links are set up or deleted. If IP transport is applied to the Iur interface, no ALCAP procedure is performed on the Iur interface after radio links are set up or deleted.

l

7.4.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between RNCs
The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure of an intra-frequency soft handover between RNCs.
Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-19

Table 7-4 Messages to be traced Interface and Protocol to Be Traced Message Name on the LMT RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDAT E Uu RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDAT E_CMP RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDAT E_FAIL NBAP_RL_SETUP_REQ NBAP_RL_SETUP_RSP Iub NBAP_RL_SETUP_FAIL NBAP_RL_RESTORE_IND NBAP_RL_DEL_REQ NBAP_RL_DEL_RSP RNSAP_RL_SETUP_REQ Iur RNSAP_RL_SETUP_RSP RNSAP_RL_SETUP_FAIL RNSAP_RL_RESTORE_IND Q. Figure 7-18 shows an example of Uu signaling tracing result.AAL2 No message name needs to be specified. Ltd.. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . Message Name in Protocols ACTIVE SET UPDATE ACTIVE SET UPDATE COMPLETE ACTIVE SET UPDATE FAILURE RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST RADIO LINK SETUP RESPONSE RADIO LINK SETUP FAILURE RADIO LINK RESTORE INDICATION RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST RADIO LINK DELETION RESPONSE RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST RADIO LINK SETUP RESPONSE RADIO LINK SETUP FAILURE RADIO LINK RESTORE INDICATION – Procedure Step 1 Create a Uu tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Prerequisite l l The RNC LMT works properly. Context Table 7-4 lists the messages to be traced. You are logged in to the RNC as a user authorized to perform tracing management. Figure 7-18 Example of Uu signaling tracing result 7-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

7-21 .. Figure 7-20 Example of Iub signaling tracing result (target RNC) Step 3 Create an Iur tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure Step 2 Create an Iub tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task. Figure 7-22 Example of Q.AAL2 signaling tracing result ----End Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Figure 7-19 shows an example of Iub signaling tracing on the source RNC. Figure 7-19 Example of Iub signaling tracing result (source RNC) Figure 7-20 shows an example of Iub signaling tracing on the target RNC. Ltd. Figure 7-22 shows an example of Q. Figure 7-21 shows an example of Iur signaling tracing result.AAL2 signaling tracing result.AAL2 tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task. Figure 7-21 Example of Iur signaling tracing result Step 4 Create a Q.

Procedure Figure 7-23 shows the radio link setup procedure for inter-RNC handover.5. 7.6 Radio Link Deletion Procedure The radio link deletion procedure is performed to release resources in a NodeB for one or more established radio links towards a UE.4. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) .4.4.4.4.5.5 Active Set Update Procedure The active set update procedure is performed to update the active set of radio links between the UE and the UTRAN.1 Radio Link Setup Procedure (Inter-RNC Handover) The radio link setup procedure for inter-RNC handover is performed to set up a radio link in a DRNC-controlled NodeB for a UE.5. Triggering Conditions The SRNC sends a RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message.5.8 Iur User Plane Release Procedure The Iur user plane release procedure is performed to release data transport bearers from the Iur interface.7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 7. 7.4.5.5 Elementary Procedures of Intra-Frequency Soft Handover Between RNCs This describes the elementary procedures of intra-frequency soft handover between RNCs in terms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions.5.3 Radio Link Restoration Procedure (Inter-RNC Handover) The radio link restoration procedure for inter-RNC handover is performed for a NodeB to notify the SRNC that the uplink synchronization of one or more radio links is achieved or re-achieved.5.5. 7. 7.2 Iub User Plane Setup Procedure The Iub user plane setup procedure is performed to set up bearers for data transmission on the Iub interface. 7.4 Iur User Plane Setup Procedure The Iur user plane setup procedure is performed to set up bearers for data transmission on the Iur interface. Ltd.7 Iub User Plane Release Procedure The Iub user plane release procedure is performed to release data transport bearers from the Iub interface.4.. 7. Radio Link Setup Procedure (Inter-RNC Handover) The radio link setup procedure for inter-RNC handover is performed to set up a radio link in a DRNC-controlled NodeB for a UE. 7. 7.4. 7-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.4.

the DRNC sends a RADIO LINK SETUP FAILURE message. the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK SETUP FAILURE message. The DRNC reports the radio link setup result to the SRNC. 7-23 . Ltd. the NodeB saves the value of the Configuration Generation ID IE contained in the RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message and sends a RADIO LINK SETUP RESPONSE message. Triggering Conditions The Iub user plane setup procedure can be triggered in one of the following conditions: l l The common transport channels are set up. l l Iub User Plane Setup Procedure The Iub user plane setup procedure is performed to set up bearers for data transmission on the Iub interface. The NodeB reports the radio link setup result to the DRNC. The NodeB reserves the necessary resources and configures the new radio link according to the parameters given in the message. l 5. If the radio link fails to be set up. If the radio link fails to be set up. 4.. indicating the failure cause. 3. If the radio link is set up. The DRNC sends a RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message to the target NodeB. l If the radio link is set up. The dedicated transport channels are set up. Procedure Figure 7-24 shows the Iub user plane setup procedure. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure Figure 7-23 Radio link setup procedure (inter-RNC handover) The procedure shown in Figure 7-23 is described as follows: 1. 2. The SRNC sends a RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message to the DRNC. the DRNC sends a RADIO LINK SETUP RESPONSE message.

the NodeB sends a QAAL2 ESTABLISH CONFIRM message. Figure 7-25 Radio link restoration procedure (inter-RNC handover) 7-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) .7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Figure 7-24 Iub user plane setup procedure The procedure shown in Figure 7-24 is described as follows: 1. If an Iub data transport bearer fails to be set up. That is. l l If the Iub data transport bearers are set up. The CRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to send a QAAL2 ESTABLISH REQUEST message to the NodeB. Radio Link Restoration Procedure (Inter-RNC Handover) The radio link restoration procedure for inter-RNC handover is performed for a NodeB to notify the SRNC that the uplink synchronization of one or more radio links is achieved or re-achieved. Triggering Conditions The NodeB detects UL signals from the UE. The NodeB uses the ALCAP protocol to send a response message to the CRNC. 2. Procedure Figure 7-25 shows the radio link restoration procedure for inter-RNC handover. the NodeB sends a QAAL2 ESTABLISH RELEASE CONFIRM message. Ltd.. the NodeB finishes UL synchronization with the UE.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 7-25 .RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure The procedure shown in Figure 7-25 is described as follows: 1. If an Iur data transport bearer fails to be set up. Procedure Figure 7-26 shows the Iur user plane setup procedure. 2.. l Active Set Update Procedure The active set update procedure is performed to update the active set of radio links between the UE and the UTRAN. The SRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to send a QAAL2 ESTABLISH REQUEST message to the DRNC. Ltd. the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK RESTORE INDICATION message to the DRNC. The DRNC sends a RADIO LINK RESTORE INDICATION message to the SRNC. After performing UL synchronization with the UE. l If the Iur data transport bearers are set up. the DRNC sends a QAAL2 ESTABLISH RELEASE CONFIRM message. Figure 7-26 Iur user plane setup procedure The procedure shown in Figure 7-26 is described as follows: 1. Iur User Plane Setup Procedure The Iur user plane setup procedure is performed to set up bearers for data transmission on the Iur interface. 2. the DRNC sends a QAAL2 ESTABLISH CONFIRM message. The DRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to send a response message to the SRNC. Triggering Conditions The DCHs are set up.

the UE sends an ACTIVE SET UPDATE COMPLETE message on the DCCH by using Acknowledged Mode (AM) Radio Link Control (RLC). The SRNC sends an ACTIVE SET UPDATE message to the UE. If the ACTIVE SET UPDATE message contains the configuration not supported by the UE or if the active set does not contain the radio links specified by the Radio Link Removal Information IE. the UE sends an ACTIVE SET UPDATE FAILURE message. 3. the message indicates radio link deletion. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . l 2.. Figure 7-27 Active set update procedure The procedure shown in Figure 7-27 is described as follows: 1. l Radio Link Deletion Procedure The radio link deletion procedure is performed to release resources in a NodeB for one or more established radio links towards a UE. If adding or deleting the radio links successfully. The UE adds or deletes the radio links according to the Radio Link Addition Information or Radio Link Removal Information IE contained in the ACTIVE SET UPDATE message. 7-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the message indicates radio link addition. The UE sends a response message to the SRNC. If a radio link needs to be added.7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Triggering Conditions The active set update procedure can be triggered in either of the following conditions: l l Radio link addition Radio link deletion Procedure Figure 7-27 shows the active set update procedure. Triggering Conditions The CRNC sends a RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST message. If a radio link needs to be deleted. Ltd.

the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK DELETION RESPONSE message. The NodeB sends a response message to the CRNC. 2. l Iub User Plane Release Procedure The Iub user plane release procedure is performed to release data transport bearers from the Iub interface. After receiving the message. Triggering Conditions The transport channels on the Iub user plane need to be removed. The Criticality Diagnostics field in the message indicates the failure cause. the NodeB deletes the radio links specified by the message. Figure 7-28 Radio link deletion procedure The procedure shown in Figure 7-28 is described as follows: 1.. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l If all the radio links are deleted.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure Procedure Figure 7-28 shows the radio link deletion procedure. the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK DELETION RESPONSE message. 7-27 . Ltd. Procedure Figure 7-29 shows the Iub user plane release procedure. The CRNC sends a RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST message to the NodeB. If any radio link fails to be deleted.

l If the Iub data transport bearers are released. The NodeB uses the ALCAP protocol to send a response message to the CRNC. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . l Iur User Plane Release Procedure The Iur user plane release procedure is performed to release data transport bearers from the Iur interface. the NodeB sends a QAAL2 RELEASE CONFIRM message to confirm the release. Ltd.. the NodeB sends a QAAL2 RELEASE CONFIRM message that indicates the failure cause. The CRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to send a QAAL2 RELEASE REQUEST message to the NodeB. 2. Procedure Figure 7-30 shows the Iur user plane release procedure.7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Figure 7-29 Iub user plane release procedure The procedure shown in Figure 7-29 is described as follows: 1. 7-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If an Iub data transport bearer fails to be released. Triggering Conditions The transport channels on the Iur user plane need to be removed.

refer to the elementary procedures.2 Triggering Conditions of Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC Intra-frequency hard handover between NodeBs in an RNC is the intra-frequency hard handover where the source and target cells are controlled by different NodeBs in an RNC. For the messages related to handover failures. 7. If an Iur data transport bearer fails to be released. The SRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to send a QAAL2 RELEASE REQUEST message to the DRNC. l If the Iur data transport bearers are released.5.5..5. 7. the DRNC sends a QAAL2 RELEASE CONFIRM message to confirm the release. Ltd.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC This describes the signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency hard handover between NodeBs in an RNC. the DRNC sends a QAAL2 RELEASE CONFIRM message that indicates the failure cause.5 Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC The procedure of intra-frequency hard handover between NodeBs in an RNC is performed to hand over a UE from a cell to an intra-frequency cell that is controlled by another NodeB in the same RNC. l 7. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 7-29 .5. 7.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure of an intra-frequency hard handover between NodeBs in an RNC. 7.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure Figure 7-30 Iur user plane release procedure The procedure shown in Figure 7-30 is described as follows: 1. 2. The DRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to send a response message to the SRNC.1 Protocols Related to Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC The procedure of intra-frequency hard handover between NodeBs in an RNC complies with some 3GPP TS25 protocols and an ITU-T protocol.

331 "Radio Resource Control (RRC)" 3GPP TS25.5..1 Protocols Related to Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC The procedure of intra-frequency hard handover between NodeBs in an RNC complies with some 3GPP TS25 protocols and an ITU-T protocol. Ltd.2630 "AAL type 2 Signalling Protocol" 7.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC This describes the signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency hard handover between NodeBs in an RNC.5 Elementary Procedures of Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC This describes the elementary procedures of intra-frequency hard handover between NodeBs in an RNC in terms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions. 7-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 7. The handover is triggered when the SRNC finds that another cell has higher signal quality than the serving cell or that the load of the serving cell is heavy.2 Triggering Conditions of Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC Intra-frequency hard handover between NodeBs in an RNC is the intra-frequency hard handover where the source and target cells are controlled by different NodeBs in an RNC. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . refer to the elementary procedures.5. The compliance protocols are as follows: l l l 3GPP TS25.7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 7. For the messages related to handover failures.5.433 "UTRAN Iub interface Node B Application Part (NBAP) signalling" ITU-T Q.5. Figure 7-31 shows the signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency hard handover between NodeBs in an RNC. 7.

NodeB 1 is the source NodeB and NodeB 2 is the target NodeB.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure Figure 7-31 Signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency hard handover between NodeBs in an RNC Note the following information about the procedure shown in Figure 7-31: l l During the handover.. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Prerequisite l l The RNC LMT works properly.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure of an intra-frequency hard handover between NodeBs in an RNC. 7-31 .5. no ALCAP procedure is performed on the Iub interface after radio links are set up or deleted. Ltd. Context Table 7-5 lists the messages to be traced. If IP transport is applied to the Iub interface. You are logged in to the RNC as a user authorized to perform tracing management. 7.

7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Table 7-5 Messages to be traced Interface and Protocol to Be Traced Message Name on the LMT Message Name in Protocols PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION COMPLETE PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION FAILURE RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST RADIO LINK SETUP RESPONSE RADIO LINK SETUP FAILURE RADIO LINK RESTORE INDICATION RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST RADIO LINK DELETION RESPONSE – RRC_PH_CH_RECFG Uu RRC_PH_CH_RECFG_CMP RRC_PH_CH_RECFG_FAIL NBAP_RL_SETUP_REQ NBAP_RL_SETUP_RSP Iub NBAP_RL_SETUP_FAIL NBAP_RL_RESTORE_IND NBAP_RL_DEL_REQ NBAP_RL_DEL_RSP Q. Figure 7-32 Example of Uu signaling tracing result Step 2 Create an Iub tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task. Figure 7-33 Example of Iub signaling tracing result 7-32 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.AAL2 No message name needs to be specified. Ltd. Figure 7-32 shows an example of Uu signaling tracing result. Figure 7-33 shows an example of Iub signaling tracing result. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . Procedure Step 1 Create a Uu tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task..

7.5.AAL2 tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.AAL2 signaling tracing result ----End 7.5.5. 7. 7.6 Iub User Plane Release Procedure The Iub user plane release procedure is performed to release data transport bearers from the Iub interface. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.5 Radio Link Deletion Procedure The radio link deletion procedure is performed to release resources in a NodeB for one or more established radio links towards a UE.3 Radio Link Restoration Procedure (Intra-RNC Handover or GSM to WCDMA CS Handover) The radio link restoration procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover) is performed for a NodeB to notify the CRNC that the uplink synchronization of one or more radio links is achieved or re-achieved. reconfigure.AAL2 signaling tracing result.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure Step 3 Create a Q.5 Elementary Procedures of Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC This describes the elementary procedures of intra-frequency hard handover between NodeBs in an RNC in terms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions. 7. Radio Link Setup Procedure (Intra-RNC Handover or GSM to WCDMA CS Handover) The radio link setup procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover) is performed to set up a radio link in an SRNC-controlled NodeB for a UE.5..5.5. 7. 7.5.5. 7-33 .5.5.1 Radio Link Setup Procedure (Intra-RNC Handover or GSM to WCDMA CS Handover) The radio link setup procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover) is performed to set up a radio link in an SRNC-controlled NodeB for a UE. or release a physical channel.5. Figure 7-34 shows an example of Q. Figure 7-34 Example of Q.5.4 Physical Channel Reconfiguration Procedure The physical channel reconfiguration procedure is performed to set up.2 Iub User Plane Setup Procedure The Iub user plane setup procedure is performed to set up bearers for data transmission on the Iub interface. Ltd.5.

Figure 7-35 Radio link setup procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover) The procedure shown in Figure 7-35 is described as follows: 1. The NodeB sends a response message to the CRNC. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) 7-34 . Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Triggering Conditions The CRNC sends a RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message. If the radio link fails to be set up. the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK SETUP FAILURE message. After receiving the message. l 2. Procedure Figure 7-35 shows the radio link setup procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover). the NodeB reserves the necessary resources and configures the new radio link according to the parameters given in the message. the NodeB saves the value of the Configuration Generation ID IE contained in the RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message and sends a RADIO LINK SETUP RESPONSE message. The CRNC sends a RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message to the NodeB. l Iub User Plane Setup Procedure The Iub user plane setup procedure is performed to set up bearers for data transmission on the Iub interface. Triggering Conditions The Iub user plane setup procedure can be triggered in one of the following conditions: l l The common transport channels are set up. If the radio link is set up. The dedicated transport channels are set up.. Ltd. The message contains the failure cause.

2. The CRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to send a QAAL2 ESTABLISH REQUEST message to the NodeB. Triggering Conditions The NodeB detects UL signals from the UE.. 7-35 . the NodeB finishes UL synchronization with the UE. That is. l If the Iub data transport bearers are set up.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure Procedure Figure 7-36 shows the Iub user plane setup procedure. Procedure Figure 7-37 shows the radio link restoration procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover). Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. l Radio Link Restoration Procedure (Intra-RNC Handover or GSM to WCDMA CS Handover) The radio link restoration procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover) is performed for a NodeB to notify the CRNC that the uplink synchronization of one or more radio links is achieved or re-achieved. The NodeB uses the ALCAP protocol to send a response message to the CRNC. Figure 7-36 Iub user plane setup procedure The procedure shown in Figure 7-36 is described as follows: 1. the NodeB sends a QAAL2 ESTABLISH CONFIRM message. the NodeB sends a QAAL2 ESTABLISH RELEASE CONFIRM message. If an Iub data transport bearer fails to be set up.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. and physical channel. reconfigure. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . 3. 7-36 The SRNC sends a PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION message to the UE to request reconfiguration of a physical channel. Triggering Conditions The SRNC sends a PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION message. The UE saves the IEs of the UE. Radio Bearer (RB). Procedure Figure 7-38 shows the physical channel reconfiguration procedure. 2. Physical Channel Reconfiguration Procedure The physical channel reconfiguration procedure is performed to set up. The UE sends a response message to the SRNC.7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Figure 7-37 Radio link restoration procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover) After performing UL synchronization with the UE. the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK RESTORE INDICATION message to the CRNC. Figure 7-38 Physical channel reconfiguration procedure The procedure shown in Figure 7-38 is described as follows: 1. transport channel. or release a physical channel. Ltd.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the UE sends a PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION COMPLETE message on the uplink DCCH by using AM RLC. The Criticality Diagnostics field in the message indicates the failure cause. 2.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide l 7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure If successfully reconfiguring the physical channels specified by the PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION message. 7-37 l Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . If failing to reconfigure the physical channels specified by the PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION message. Ltd. The value of the Failure cause IE contained in the PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION FAILURE message is "physical channel failure". If any radio link fails to be deleted. The CRNC sends a RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST message to the NodeB. the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK DELETION RESPONSE message. Figure 7-39 Radio link deletion procedure The procedure shown in Figure 7-39 is described as follows: 1. the NodeB deletes the radio links specified by the message. The NodeB sends a response message to the CRNC. the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK DELETION RESPONSE message. After receiving the message. l Radio Link Deletion Procedure The radio link deletion procedure is performed to release resources in a NodeB for one or more established radio links towards a UE. l If all the radio links are deleted. Procedure Figure 7-39 shows the radio link deletion procedure. Triggering Conditions The CRNC sends a RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST message.. the UE restores the configuration to the old physical channel configuration and sends a PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION FAILURE message on the DCCH by using AM RLC.

Procedure Figure 7-40 shows the Iub user plane release procedure. l If the Iub data transport bearers are released.6 Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between RNCs The procedure of intra-frequency hard handover between RNCs is performed to hand over a UE from a cell to an intra-frequency cell that is controlled by another RNC. the NodeB sends a QAAL2 RELEASE CONFIRM message to confirm the release.2 Triggering Conditions of Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between RNCs 7-38 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) .. Figure 7-40 Iub user plane release procedure The procedure shown in Figure 7-40 is described as follows: 1.6. the NodeB sends a QAAL2 RELEASE CONFIRM message that indicates the failure cause.7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Iub User Plane Release Procedure The Iub user plane release procedure is performed to release data transport bearers from the Iub interface. Ltd.1 Protocols Related to Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between RNCs The procedure of intra-frequency hard handover between RNCs complies with some 3GPP TS25 protocols and an ITU-T protocol. Triggering Conditions The transport channels on the Iub user plane need to be removed. 7. l 7. If an Iub data transport bearer fails to be released. 2. The NodeB uses the ALCAP protocol to send a response message to the CRNC. 7.6. The CRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to send a QAAL2 RELEASE REQUEST message to the NodeB.

4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between RNCs The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure of an intra-frequency hard handover between RNCs.423 "UTRAN Iur interface RNSAP signalling" 3GPP TS25. 7.6. Ltd.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between RNCs This describes the signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency hard handover between RNCs.6.6. Figure 7-41 shows the signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency hard handover between RNCs. refer to the elementary procedures. The handover is triggered when the SRNC finds that another cell has higher signal quality than the serving cell or that the load of the serving cell is heavy.433 "UTRAN Iub interface Node B Application Part (NBAP) signalling" ITU-T Q. 7.6. The compliance protocols are as follows: l l l l 3GPP TS25.6. refer to the elementary procedures.2 Triggering Conditions of Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between RNCs Intra-frequency hard handover between RNCs is the intra-frequency hard handover where the source and target cells are controlled by different RNCs.2630 "AAL type 2 Signalling Protocol" 7. 7-39 .RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure Intra-frequency hard handover between RNCs is the intra-frequency hard handover where the source and target cells are controlled by different RNCs. For the messages related to handover failures. 7..1 Protocols Related to Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between RNCs The procedure of intra-frequency hard handover between RNCs complies with some 3GPP TS25 protocols and an ITU-T protocol. 7. For the messages related to handover failures.6.5 Elementary Procedures of Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between RNCs This describes the elementary procedures of intra-frequency hard handover between RNCs in terms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between RNCs This describes the signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency hard handover between RNCs. 7.331 "Radio Resource Control (RRC)" 3GPP TS25. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

l 7.7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Figure 7-41 Signaling procedure of a successful intra-frequency hard handover between RNCs Note the following information about the procedure shown in Figure 7-41: l l During the handover. no ALCAP procedure is performed on the Iur interface after radio links are set up or deleted.. Ltd.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between RNCs The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure of an intra-frequency hard handover between RNCs. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Prerequisite l The RNC LMT works properly. If IP transport is applied to the Iub interface. If IP transport is applied to the Iur interface. NodeB 1 is the source NodeB and NodeB 2 is the target NodeB.6. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) 7-40 . no ALCAP procedure is performed on the Iub interface after radio links are set up or deleted.

7-41 . Table 7-6 Messages to be traced Interface and Protocol to Be Traced Message Name on the LMT Message Name in Protocols PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION COMPLETE PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION FAILURE RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST RADIO LINK SETUP RESPONSE RADIO LINK SETUP FAILURE RADIO LINK RESTORE INDICATION RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST RADIO LINK DELETION RESPONSE RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST RADIO LINK SETUP RESPONSE RADIO LINK SETUP FAILURE RADIO LINK RESTORE INDICATION – RRC_PH_CH_RECFG Uu RRC_PH_CH_RECFG_CMP RRC_PH_CH_RECFG_FAIL NBAP_RL_SETUP_REQ NBAP_RL_SETUP_RSP Iub NBAP_RL_SETUP_FAIL NBAP_RL_RESTORE_IND NBAP_RL_DEL_REQ NBAP_RL_DEL_RSP RNSAP_RL_SETUP_REQ Iur RNSAP_RL_SETUP_RSP RNSAP_RL_SETUP_FAIL RNSAP_RL_RESTORE_IND Q. Context Table 7-6 lists the messages to be traced.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide l 7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure You are logged in to the RNC as a user authorized to perform tracing management. Ltd.. Procedure Step 1 Create a Uu tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task. Figure 7-42 Example of Uu signaling tracing result Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.AAL2 No message name needs to be specified. Figure 7-42 shows an example of Uu signaling tracing result.

7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Step 2 Create an Iub tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.AAL2 signaling tracing result. Figure 7-46 Example of Q. Figure 7-43 shows an example of Iub signaling tracing on the source RNC. Figure 7-45 shows an example of Iur signaling tracing result. Ltd. Figure 7-44 Example of Iub signaling tracing result (target RNC) Step 3 Create an Iur tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.AAL2 signaling tracing result ----End 7-42 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Figure 7-43 Example of Iub signaling tracing result (source RNC) Figure 7-44 shows an example of Iub signaling tracing on the target RNC. Figure 7-46 shows an example of Q..AAL2 tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task. Figure 7-45 Example of Iur signaling tracing result Step 4 Create a Q. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) .

5. or release a physical channel.6.4 Iur User Plane Setup Procedure The Iur user plane setup procedure is performed to set up bearers for data transmission on the Iur interface. 7.6.6. 7.5. 7-43 .6.5. 7. 7.5.5.1 Radio Link Setup Procedure (Inter-RNC Handover) The radio link setup procedure for inter-RNC handover is performed to set up a radio link in a DRNC-controlled NodeB for a UE.5 Physical Channel Reconfiguration Procedure The physical channel reconfiguration procedure is performed to set up.5 Elementary Procedures of Intra-Frequency Hard Handover Between RNCs This describes the elementary procedures of intra-frequency hard handover between RNCs in terms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions. 7. 7.3 Radio Link Restoration Procedure (Inter-RNC Handover) The radio link restoration procedure for inter-RNC handover is performed for a NodeB to notify the SRNC that the uplink synchronization of one or more radio links is achieved or re-achieved.2 Iub User Plane Setup Procedure The Iub user plane setup procedure is performed to set up bearers for data transmission on the Iub interface.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure 7.5.5.8 Iur User Plane Release Procedure The Iur user plane release procedure is performed to release data transport bearers from the Iur interface.6.6. Ltd. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 7. Procedure Figure 7-47 shows the radio link setup procedure for inter-RNC handover. 7. Radio Link Setup Procedure (Inter-RNC Handover) The radio link setup procedure for inter-RNC handover is performed to set up a radio link in a DRNC-controlled NodeB for a UE.6 Radio Link Deletion Procedure The radio link deletion procedure is performed to release resources in a NodeB for one or more established radio links towards a UE.6.7 Iub User Plane Release Procedure The Iub user plane release procedure is performed to release data transport bearers from the Iub interface.6.5.. Triggering Conditions The SRNC sends a RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message.6. reconfigure.

7-44 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If the radio link fails to be set up. l 5. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . the DRNC sends a RADIO LINK SETUP RESPONSE message. l If the radio link is set up. 3. indicating the failure cause. The SRNC sends a RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message to the DRNC.. The DRNC sends a RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message to the target NodeB. If the radio link fails to be set up. The NodeB reports the radio link setup result to the DRNC. Procedure Figure 7-48 shows the Iub user plane setup procedure. 4. l l Iub User Plane Setup Procedure The Iub user plane setup procedure is performed to set up bearers for data transmission on the Iub interface. The DRNC reports the radio link setup result to the SRNC. 2. The NodeB reserves the necessary resources and configures the new radio link according to the parameters given in the message. If the radio link is set up. the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK SETUP FAILURE message. the DRNC sends a RADIO LINK SETUP FAILURE message. The dedicated transport channels are set up. Triggering Conditions The Iub user plane setup procedure can be triggered in one of the following conditions: l l The common transport channels are set up. the NodeB saves the value of the Configuration Generation ID IE contained in the RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message and sends a RADIO LINK SETUP RESPONSE message.7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Figure 7-47 Radio link setup procedure (inter-RNC handover) The procedure shown in Figure 7-47 is described as follows: 1. Ltd.

The NodeB uses the ALCAP protocol to send a response message to the CRNC. the NodeB sends a QAAL2 ESTABLISH CONFIRM message.. That is. The CRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to send a QAAL2 ESTABLISH REQUEST message to the NodeB. the NodeB finishes UL synchronization with the UE. Figure 7-49 Radio link restoration procedure (inter-RNC handover) Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure Figure 7-48 Iub user plane setup procedure The procedure shown in Figure 7-48 is described as follows: 1. the NodeB sends a QAAL2 ESTABLISH RELEASE CONFIRM message. Ltd. Radio Link Restoration Procedure (Inter-RNC Handover) The radio link restoration procedure for inter-RNC handover is performed for a NodeB to notify the SRNC that the uplink synchronization of one or more radio links is achieved or re-achieved. 2. l l If the Iub data transport bearers are set up. 7-45 . If an Iub data transport bearer fails to be set up. Procedure Figure 7-49 shows the radio link restoration procedure for inter-RNC handover. Triggering Conditions The NodeB detects UL signals from the UE.

7-46 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the DRNC sends a QAAL2 ESTABLISH CONFIRM message. The DRNC sends a RADIO LINK RESTORE INDICATION message to the SRNC. or release a physical channel.7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide The procedure shown in Figure 7-49 is described as follows: 1. the DRNC sends a QAAL2 ESTABLISH RELEASE CONFIRM message. 2. After performing UL synchronization with the UE. Ltd. The DRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to send a response message to the SRNC. l Physical Channel Reconfiguration Procedure The physical channel reconfiguration procedure is performed to set up. The SRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to send a QAAL2 ESTABLISH REQUEST message to the DRNC. reconfigure. Iur User Plane Setup Procedure The Iur user plane setup procedure is performed to set up bearers for data transmission on the Iur interface. Procedure Figure 7-50 shows the Iur user plane setup procedure.. the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK RESTORE INDICATION message to the DRNC. 2. If an Iur data transport bearer fails to be set up. Triggering Conditions The DCHs are set up. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . l If the Iur data transport bearers are set up. Figure 7-50 Iur user plane setup procedure The procedure shown in Figure 7-50 is described as follows: 1.

transport channel. Figure 7-51 Physical channel reconfiguration procedure The procedure shown in Figure 7-51 is described as follows: 1. l Radio Link Deletion Procedure The radio link deletion procedure is performed to release resources in a NodeB for one or more established radio links towards a UE. Triggering Conditions The CRNC sends a RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST message. Procedure Figure 7-51 shows the physical channel reconfiguration procedure. and physical channel. If failing to reconfigure the physical channels specified by the PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION message. The UE saves the IEs of the UE. Procedure Figure 7-52 shows the radio link deletion procedure. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The value of the Failure cause IE contained in the PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION FAILURE message is "physical channel failure". The SRNC sends a PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION message to the UE to request reconfiguration of a physical channel. the UE restores the configuration to the old physical channel configuration and sends a PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION FAILURE message on the DCCH by using AM RLC. Radio Bearer (RB).. 2. l If successfully reconfiguring the physical channels specified by the PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION message. 7-47 . The UE sends a response message to the SRNC.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure Triggering Conditions The SRNC sends a PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION message. Ltd. the UE sends a PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION COMPLETE message on the uplink DCCH by using AM RLC. 3.

If any radio link fails to be deleted. The Criticality Diagnostics field in the message indicates the failure cause.7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Figure 7-52 Radio link deletion procedure The procedure shown in Figure 7-52 is described as follows: 1. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK DELETION RESPONSE message. 2. Ltd. After receiving the message. 7-48 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l Iub User Plane Release Procedure The Iub user plane release procedure is performed to release data transport bearers from the Iub interface. l If all the radio links are deleted. The NodeB sends a response message to the CRNC. the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK DELETION RESPONSE message. The CRNC sends a RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST message to the NodeB. Triggering Conditions The transport channels on the Iub user plane need to be removed. Procedure Figure 7-53 shows the Iub user plane release procedure. the NodeB deletes the radio links specified by the message..

The CRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to send a QAAL2 RELEASE REQUEST message to the NodeB. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure Figure 7-53 Iub user plane release procedure The procedure shown in Figure 7-53 is described as follows: 1. the NodeB sends a QAAL2 RELEASE CONFIRM message that indicates the failure cause. The NodeB uses the ALCAP protocol to send a response message to the CRNC. 7-49 . l If the Iub data transport bearers are released. Ltd. Procedure Figure 7-54 shows the Iur user plane release procedure. If an Iub data transport bearer fails to be released. l Iur User Plane Release Procedure The Iur user plane release procedure is performed to release data transport bearers from the Iur interface.. the NodeB sends a QAAL2 RELEASE CONFIRM message to confirm the release. Triggering Conditions The transport channels on the Iur user plane need to be removed. 2.

the DRNC sends a QAAL2 RELEASE CONFIRM message that indicates the failure cause. l 7-50 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l If the Iur data transport bearers are released. The DRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to send a response message to the SRNC.7 Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Figure 7-54 Iur user plane release procedure The procedure shown in Figure 7-54 is described as follows: 1. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . the DRNC sends a QAAL2 RELEASE CONFIRM message to confirm the release. Ltd. If an Iur data transport bearer fails to be released.. The SRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to send a QAAL2 RELEASE REQUEST message to the DRNC. 2.

8-1 . Ltd. triggering conditions. triggering conditions. 8. 8. 8.3 Inter-Frequency Handover Between RNCs The procedure of inter-frequency handover between RNCs is performed to hand over a UE from a cell to an inter-frequency cell that is controlled by another RNC. This topic describes inter-frequency handover in terms of types.1 Types of Inter-Frequency Handover Inter-frequency handovers are categorized into two types: handover within an RNC and handover between RNCs..RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 8 Inter-Frequency Handover Procedure 8 Inter-Frequency Handover Procedure About This Chapter The inter-frequency handover procedure is performed to hand over a UE from the WCDMA cell that it camps on to an inter-frequency WCDMA cell. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. signaling procedure of a successful inter-frequency handover. protocols. and signaling tracing on the RNC LMT.2 Inter-Frequency Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC The procedure of inter-frequency handover between NodeBs in an RNC is performed to hand over a UE from a cell to an inter-frequency cell that is controlled by the same RNC. and signaling in normal and abnormal conditions. This topic also describes the elementary procedures in terms of functions.

When a UE performs an inter-frequency handover between RNCs with UE-notinvolved relocation. For the messages related to handover failures. 8-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.8 Inter-Frequency Handover Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 8. no Iur interface exists between the two RNCs. 8. an Iur interface must be configured between the two RNCs. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . Table 8-1 lists the types of inter-frequency handover.2. When a UE performs an inter-frequency handover between RNCs with UEinvolved relocation.2. Table 8-1 Types of inter-frequency handover Type Interfrequency handover within an RNC Subtype Inter-frequency handover within a NodeB Inter-frequency handover between NodeBs Inter-frequency handover between RNCs without relocation Inter-frequency handover between RNCs with UE-notinvolved relocation Inter-frequency handover between RNCs with UEinvolved relocation Description The procedures of the two subtypes are similar. Interfrequency handover between RNCs 8.1 Types of Inter-Frequency Handover Inter-frequency handovers are categorized into two types: handover within an RNC and handover between RNCs.1 Protocols Related to Inter-Frequency Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC The procedure of inter-frequency handover between NodeBs in an RNC complies with some 3GPP TS25 protocols and an ITU-T protocol. Ltd.2.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Inter-Frequency Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure of an inter-frequency handover between NodeBs in an RNC.2 Inter-Frequency Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC The procedure of inter-frequency handover between NodeBs in an RNC is performed to hand over a UE from a cell to an inter-frequency cell that is controlled by the same RNC. They are described in the procedure of inter-frequency handover between NodeBs in an RNC. refer to the elementary procedures.. 8. 8.2 Triggering Conditions of Inter-Frequency Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC Inter-frequency handover between NodeBs in an RNC is the inter-frequency handover where the source and target cells are controlled by different NodeBs in an RNC.2.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Inter-Frequency Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC This describes the signaling procedure of a successful inter-frequency handover between NodeBs in an RNC. 8.

The handover is triggered when the signal quality of the serving cell is degraded or the load of the serving cell is heavy. Figure 8-1 shows the signaling procedure of a successful inter-frequency handover between NodeBs in an RNC.2.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 8 Inter-Frequency Handover Procedure 8. Ltd. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.2. 8.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Inter-Frequency Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC This describes the signaling procedure of a successful inter-frequency handover between NodeBs in an RNC.1 Protocols Related to Inter-Frequency Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC The procedure of inter-frequency handover between NodeBs in an RNC complies with some 3GPP TS25 protocols and an ITU-T protocol.2.2 Triggering Conditions of Inter-Frequency Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC Inter-frequency handover between NodeBs in an RNC is the inter-frequency handover where the source and target cells are controlled by different NodeBs in an RNC.2630 "AAL type 2 Signalling Protocol" 8. refer to the elementary procedures. For the messages related to handover failures.331 "Radio Resource Control (RRC)" 3GPP TS25..2. 8-3 .433 "UTRAN Iub interface Node B Application Part (NBAP) signalling" ITU-T Q. 8. The compliance protocols are as follows: l l l 3GPP TS25.5 Elementary Procedures of Inter-Frequency Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC This describes the elementary procedures of inter-frequency handover between NodeBs in an RNC in terms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions.

l l 8. You are logged in to the RNC as a user authorized to perform tracing management. During the handover. If the source and target cells are controlled by the same NodeB.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Inter-Frequency Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure of an inter-frequency handover between NodeBs in an RNC. If IP transport is applied to the Iub interface.. 8-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . and the radio link restoration procedure is excluded.2. Context Table 8-2 lists the messages to be traced. the radio link setup procedure should be replaced by the radio link addition procedure. no ALCAP procedure is performed on the Iub interface after radio links are set up or deleted. Prerequisite l l The RNC LMT works properly.8 Inter-Frequency Handover Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Figure 8-1 Signaling procedure of a successful inter-frequency handover between NodeBs in an RNC Note the following information about the procedure shown in Figure 8-1: l The radio link setup procedure shown in the figure applies when the source and target cells of the handover are controlled by different NodeBs. NodeB 1 is the source NodeB and NodeB 2 is the target NodeB. Ltd.

Figure 8-2 shows an example of Uu signaling tracing result.AAL2 No message name needs to be specified. Figure 8-3 Example of Iub signaling tracing result Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. Figure 8-2 Example of Uu signaling tracing result Step 2 Create an Iub tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task. Figure 8-3 shows an example of Iub signaling tracing result.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 8 Inter-Frequency Handover Procedure Table 8-2 Messages to be traced Interface and Protocol to Be Traced Message Name on the LMT Message Name in Protocols PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION COMPLETE PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION FAILURE RADIO LINK ADDITION REQUEST RADIO LINK ADDITION RESPONSE RADIO LINK ADDITION FAILURE RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST RADIO LINK SETUP RESPONSE RADIO LINK SETUP FAILURE RADIO LINK RESTORE INDICATION RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST RADIO LINK DELETION RESPONSE – RRC_PH_CH_RECFG Uu RRC_PH_CH_RECFG_CMP RRC_PH_CH_RECFG_FAIL NBAP_RL_ADD_REQ NBAP_RL_ADD_RSP NBAP_RL_ADD_FAIL NBAP_RL_SETUP_REQ Iub NBAP_RL_SETUP_RSP NBAP_RL_SETUP_FAIL NBAP_RL_RESTORE_IND NBAP_RL_DEL_REQ NBAP_RL_DEL_RSP Q.. 8-5 . Procedure Step 1 Create a Uu tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.

4 Radio Link Restoration Procedure (Intra-RNC Handover or GSM to WCDMA CS Handover) The radio link restoration procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover) is performed for a NodeB to notify the CRNC that the uplink synchronization of one or more radio links is achieved or re-achieved.AAL2 signaling tracing result ----End 8.8 Inter-Frequency Handover Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Step 3 Create a Q.2. or release a physical channel.5. 8.5.6 Radio Link Deletion Procedure The radio link deletion procedure is performed to release resources in a NodeB for one or more established radio links towards a UE.AAL2 tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.5 Physical Channel Reconfiguration Procedure The physical channel reconfiguration procedure is performed to set up.3 Iub User Plane Setup Procedure The Iub user plane setup procedure is performed to set up bearers for data transmission on the Iub interface. Ltd. 8. reconfigure.5 Elementary Procedures of Inter-Frequency Handover Between NodeBs in an RNC This describes the elementary procedures of inter-frequency handover between NodeBs in an RNC in terms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions. Figure 8-4 shows an example of Q.2.5.5.2. 8.5.1 Radio Link Addition Procedure The radio link addition procedure is performed to add one or more radio links towards a UE.2.7 Iub User Plane Release Procedure The Iub user plane release procedure is performed to release data transport bearers from the Iub interface. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) .2 Radio Link Setup Procedure (Intra-RNC Handover or GSM to WCDMA CS Handover) The radio link setup procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover) is performed to set up a radio link in an SRNC-controlled NodeB for a UE. 8-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 8. 8.2. 8.2. Figure 8-4 Example of Q.5. 8.2. Radio Link Addition Procedure The radio link addition procedure is performed to add one or more radio links towards a UE.AAL2 signaling tracing result.5.2..

The message contains the failure cause in the Cause IE. If any radio link fails to be added. Figure 8-5 Radio link addition procedure The procedure shown in Figure 8-5 is described as follows: 1. the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK ADDITION FAILURE message. The NodeB sends a response message to the CRNC.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 8 Inter-Frequency Handover Procedure Triggering Conditions The CRNC sends a RADIO LINK ADDITION REQUEST message. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. l Radio Link Setup Procedure (Intra-RNC Handover or GSM to WCDMA CS Handover) The radio link setup procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover) is performed to set up a radio link in an SRNC-controlled NodeB for a UE. After receiving the message. Procedure Figure 8-6 shows the radio link setup procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover). the NodeB reserves the necessary resources and configures the new radio link or links according to the parameters given in the message. Triggering Conditions The CRNC sends a RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message. The CRNC sends a RADIO LINK ADDITION REQUEST message to the NodeB. If all the requested radio links are added.. the NodeB saves the value of the Configuration Generation ID IE contained in the RADIO LINK ADDITION REQUEST message and sends a RADIO LINK ADDITION RESPONSE message. l 2. 8-7 . Procedure Figure 8-5 shows the radio link addition procedure.

Triggering Conditions The Iub user plane setup procedure can be triggered in one of the following conditions: l l The common transport channels are set up. Procedure Figure 8-7 shows the Iub user plane setup procedure. the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK SETUP FAILURE message. If the radio link is set up.. Ltd. The message contains the failure cause. The NodeB sends a response message to the CRNC. l Iub User Plane Setup Procedure The Iub user plane setup procedure is performed to set up bearers for data transmission on the Iub interface. the NodeB reserves the necessary resources and configures the new radio link according to the parameters given in the message. The dedicated transport channels are set up. the NodeB saves the value of the Configuration Generation ID IE contained in the RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message and sends a RADIO LINK SETUP RESPONSE message. l 2. 8-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If the radio link fails to be set up.8 Inter-Frequency Handover Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Figure 8-6 Radio link setup procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover) The procedure shown in Figure 8-6 is described as follows: 1. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . After receiving the message. The CRNC sends a RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message to the NodeB.

The CRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to send a QAAL2 ESTABLISH REQUEST message to the NodeB. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If an Iub data transport bearer fails to be set up. The NodeB uses the ALCAP protocol to send a response message to the CRNC. l Radio Link Restoration Procedure (Intra-RNC Handover or GSM to WCDMA CS Handover) The radio link restoration procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover) is performed for a NodeB to notify the CRNC that the uplink synchronization of one or more radio links is achieved or re-achieved.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 8 Inter-Frequency Handover Procedure Figure 8-7 Iub user plane setup procedure The procedure shown in Figure 8-7 is described as follows: 1.. l If the Iub data transport bearers are set up. Triggering Conditions The NodeB detects UL signals from the UE. Procedure Figure 8-8 shows the radio link restoration procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover). the NodeB sends a QAAL2 ESTABLISH RELEASE CONFIRM message. the NodeB sends a QAAL2 ESTABLISH CONFIRM message. 8-9 . 2. the NodeB finishes UL synchronization with the UE. Ltd. That is.

The UE saves the IEs of the UE. Physical Channel Reconfiguration Procedure The physical channel reconfiguration procedure is performed to set up. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK RESTORE INDICATION message to the CRNC. or release a physical channel.. Figure 8-9 Physical channel reconfiguration procedure The procedure shown in Figure 8-9 is described as follows: 1. Ltd. 2.8 Inter-Frequency Handover Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Figure 8-8 Radio link restoration procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover) After performing UL synchronization with the UE. The UE sends a response message to the SRNC. Radio Bearer (RB). Triggering Conditions The SRNC sends a PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION message. 8-10 The SRNC sends a PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION message to the UE to request reconfiguration of a physical channel. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 3. and physical channel. transport channel. Procedure Figure 8-9 shows the physical channel reconfiguration procedure. reconfigure.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l Radio Link Deletion Procedure The radio link deletion procedure is performed to release resources in a NodeB for one or more established radio links towards a UE. the UE restores the configuration to the old physical channel configuration and sends a PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION FAILURE message on the DCCH by using AM RLC.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide l 8 Inter-Frequency Handover Procedure If successfully reconfiguring the physical channels specified by the PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION message. the UE sends a PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION COMPLETE message on the uplink DCCH by using AM RLC. the NodeB deletes the radio links specified by the message. The NodeB sends a response message to the CRNC. 8-11 l Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . Ltd. the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK DELETION RESPONSE message.. The Criticality Diagnostics field in the message indicates the failure cause. If any radio link fails to be deleted. The value of the Failure cause IE contained in the PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION FAILURE message is "physical channel failure". the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK DELETION RESPONSE message. If failing to reconfigure the physical channels specified by the PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION message. l If all the radio links are deleted. Triggering Conditions The CRNC sends a RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST message. The CRNC sends a RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST message to the NodeB. After receiving the message. Figure 8-10 Radio link deletion procedure The procedure shown in Figure 8-10 is described as follows: 1. Procedure Figure 8-10 shows the radio link deletion procedure. 2.

3 Inter-Frequency Handover Between RNCs The procedure of inter-frequency handover between RNCs is performed to hand over a UE from a cell to an inter-frequency cell that is controlled by another RNC.. l 8.2 Triggering Conditions of Inter-Frequency Handover Between RNCs 8-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 8. The CRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to send a QAAL2 RELEASE REQUEST message to the NodeB. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . Figure 8-11 Iub user plane release procedure The procedure shown in Figure 8-11 is described as follows: 1. If an Iub data transport bearer fails to be released. The NodeB uses the ALCAP protocol to send a response message to the CRNC. the NodeB sends a QAAL2 RELEASE CONFIRM message that indicates the failure cause. Ltd.8 Inter-Frequency Handover Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Iub User Plane Release Procedure The Iub user plane release procedure is performed to release data transport bearers from the Iub interface. 8. Procedure Figure 8-11 shows the Iub user plane release procedure.3.3.1 Protocols Related to Inter-Frequency Handover Between RNCs The procedure of inter-frequency handover between RNCs complies with some 3GPP TS25 protocols and an ITU-T protocol. Triggering Conditions The transport channels on the Iub user plane need to be removed. 2. l If the Iub data transport bearers are released. the NodeB sends a QAAL2 RELEASE CONFIRM message to confirm the release.

8-13 .4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Inter-Frequency Handover Between RNCs The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure of an inter-frequency handover between RNCs. refer to the elementary procedures. The compliance protocols are as follows: l l l l 3GPP TS25.2630 "AAL type 2 Signalling Protocol" 8.1 Protocols Related to Inter-Frequency Handover Between RNCs The procedure of inter-frequency handover between RNCs complies with some 3GPP TS25 protocols and an ITU-T protocol.3.433 "UTRAN Iub interface Node B Application Part (NBAP) signalling" ITU-T Q. The handover is triggered when the signal quality of the serving cell is degraded or the load of the serving cell is heavy. For the messages related to handover failures.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 8 Inter-Frequency Handover Procedure Inter-frequency handover between RNCs is the inter-frequency handover where the source and target cells are controlled by different RNCs.331 "Radio Resource Control (RRC)" 3GPP TS25.3.423 "UTRAN Iur interface RNSANP signalling" 3GPP TS25.3.. 8.3.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Inter-Frequency Handover Between RNCs This describes the signaling procedure of a successful inter-frequency handover between RNCs.3. Ltd.5 Elementary Procedures of Inter-Frequency Handover Between RNCs This describes the elementary procedures of inter-frequency handover between RNCs in terms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions. For the messages related to handover failures. Figure 8-12 shows the signaling procedure of a successful inter-frequency handover between RNCs. refer to the elementary procedures. 8. 8. 8. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3. 8.2 Triggering Conditions of Inter-Frequency Handover Between RNCs Inter-frequency handover between RNCs is the inter-frequency handover where the source and target cells are controlled by different RNCs.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Inter-Frequency Handover Between RNCs This describes the signaling procedure of a successful inter-frequency handover between RNCs.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) 8-14 .4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Inter-Frequency Handover Between RNCs The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure of an inter-frequency handover between RNCs.. If IP transport is applied to the Iur interface. If IP transport is applied to the Iub interface. Ltd. You are logged in to the RNC as a user authorized to perform tracing management. no ALCAP procedure is performed on the Iur interface after radio links are set up or deleted. l 8. no ALCAP procedure is performed on the Iub interface after radio links are set up or deleted.8 Inter-Frequency Handover Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Figure 8-12 Signaling procedure of a successful inter-frequency handover between RNCs Note the following information about the procedure shown in Figure 8-12: l l During the handover. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3. NodeB 1 is the source NodeB and NodeB 2 is the target NodeB. Prerequisite l l The RNC LMT works properly.

8-15 . Figure 8-13 shows an example of Uu signaling tracing result. Figure 8-13 Example of Uu signaling tracing result Step 2 Create an Iub tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.AAL2 No message name needs to be specified. Table 8-3 Messages to be traced Interface and Protocol to Be Traced Message Name on the LMT Message Name in Protocols PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION COMPLETE PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION FAILURE RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST RADIO LINK SETUP RESPONSE RADIO LINK SETUP FAILURE RADIO LINK RESTORE INDICATION RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST RADIO LINK DELETION RESPONSE RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST RADIO LINK SETUP RESPONSE RADIO LINK SETUP FAILURE RADIO LINK RESTORE INDICATION – RRC_PH_CH_RECFG Uu RRC_PH_CH_RECFG_CMP RRC_PH_CH_RECFG_FAIL NBAP_RL_SETUP_REQ NBAP_RL_SETUP_RSP Iub NBAP_RL_SETUP_FAIL NBAP_RL_RESTORE_IND NBAP_RL_DEL_REQ NBAP_RL_DEL_RSP RNSAP_RL_SETUP_REQ Iur RNSAP_RL_SETUP_RSP RNSAP_RL_SETUP_FAIL RNSAP_RL_RESTORE_IND Q.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 8 Inter-Frequency Handover Procedure Context Table 8-3 lists the messages to be traced. Ltd. Figure 8-14 shows an example of Iub signaling tracing on the source RNC. Procedure Step 1 Create a Uu tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task..

Ltd.3.AAL2 signaling tracing result ----End 8. 8.AAL2 tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.5.. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) .AAL2 signaling tracing result. Figure 8-16 shows an example of Iur signaling tracing result.3.8 Inter-Frequency Handover Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Figure 8-14 Example of Iub signaling tracing result (source RNC) Figure 8-15 shows an example of Iub signaling tracing on the target RNC. Figure 8-16 Example of Iur signaling tracing result Step 4 Create a Q.5 Elementary Procedures of Inter-Frequency Handover Between RNCs This describes the elementary procedures of inter-frequency handover between RNCs in terms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions. Figure 8-15 Example of Iub signaling tracing result (target RNC) Step 3 Create an Iur tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task. Figure 8-17 Example of Q.1 Radio Link Setup Procedure (Inter-RNC Handover) 8-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Figure 8-17 shows an example of Q.

reconfigure. Procedure Figure 8-18 shows the radio link setup procedure for inter-RNC handover. 8-17 .3. Ltd.4 Iur User Plane Setup Procedure The Iur user plane setup procedure is performed to set up bearers for data transmission on the Iur interface.3. 8. Radio Link Setup Procedure (Inter-RNC Handover) The radio link setup procedure for inter-RNC handover is performed to set up a radio link in a DRNC-controlled NodeB for a UE. 8.3.6 Radio Link Deletion Procedure The radio link deletion procedure is performed to release resources in a NodeB for one or more established radio links towards a UE..8 Iur User Plane Release Procedure The Iur user plane release procedure is performed to release data transport bearers from the Iur interface. Triggering Conditions The SRNC sends a RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 8 Inter-Frequency Handover Procedure The radio link setup procedure for inter-RNC handover is performed to set up a radio link in a DRNC-controlled NodeB for a UE.5.5.2 Iub User Plane Setup Procedure The Iub user plane setup procedure is performed to set up bearers for data transmission on the Iub interface.3 Radio Link Restoration Procedure (Inter-RNC Handover) The radio link restoration procedure for inter-RNC handover is performed for a NodeB to notify the SRNC that the uplink synchronization of one or more radio links is achieved or re-achieved. 8. 8.3.7 Iub User Plane Release Procedure The Iub user plane release procedure is performed to release data transport bearers from the Iub interface.5 Physical Channel Reconfiguration Procedure The physical channel reconfiguration procedure is performed to set up.3.3. Figure 8-18 Radio link setup procedure (inter-RNC handover) Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 8.5. 8.3.5.5. 8.5. or release a physical channel.5.

3. If the radio link fails to be set up. l l Iub User Plane Setup Procedure The Iub user plane setup procedure is performed to set up bearers for data transmission on the Iub interface. If the radio link fails to be set up. the DRNC sends a RADIO LINK SETUP FAILURE message. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) .8 Inter-Frequency Handover Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide The procedure shown in Figure 8-18 is described as follows: 1. indicating the failure cause. Triggering Conditions The Iub user plane setup procedure can be triggered in one of the following conditions: l l The common transport channels are set up. The dedicated transport channels are set up. the DRNC sends a RADIO LINK SETUP RESPONSE message. the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK SETUP FAILURE message. 4. The NodeB reports the radio link setup result to the DRNC. l If the radio link is set up. The DRNC reports the radio link setup result to the SRNC. the NodeB saves the value of the Configuration Generation ID IE contained in the RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message and sends a RADIO LINK SETUP RESPONSE message. Figure 8-19 Iub user plane setup procedure 8-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 2. The DRNC sends a RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message to the target NodeB. l 5. If the radio link is set up. Procedure Figure 8-19 shows the Iub user plane setup procedure. The SRNC sends a RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message to the DRNC. Ltd. The NodeB reserves the necessary resources and configures the new radio link according to the parameters given in the message..

Triggering Conditions The NodeB detects UL signals from the UE. Procedure Figure 8-20 shows the radio link restoration procedure for inter-RNC handover. Iur User Plane Setup Procedure The Iur user plane setup procedure is performed to set up bearers for data transmission on the Iur interface. l If the Iub data transport bearers are set up. The DRNC sends a RADIO LINK RESTORE INDICATION message to the SRNC. The NodeB uses the ALCAP protocol to send a response message to the CRNC. If an Iub data transport bearer fails to be set up. the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK RESTORE INDICATION message to the DRNC. 2. Triggering Conditions The DCHs are set up.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 8 Inter-Frequency Handover Procedure The procedure shown in Figure 8-19 is described as follows: 1. 8-19 . The CRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to send a QAAL2 ESTABLISH REQUEST message to the NodeB. That is.. the NodeB finishes UL synchronization with the UE. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Figure 8-20 Radio link restoration procedure (inter-RNC handover) The procedure shown in Figure 8-20 is described as follows: 1. the NodeB sends a QAAL2 ESTABLISH CONFIRM message. After performing UL synchronization with the UE. 2. Ltd. the NodeB sends a QAAL2 ESTABLISH RELEASE CONFIRM message. l Radio Link Restoration Procedure (Inter-RNC Handover) The radio link restoration procedure for inter-RNC handover is performed for a NodeB to notify the SRNC that the uplink synchronization of one or more radio links is achieved or re-achieved.

Figure 8-21 Iur user plane setup procedure The procedure shown in Figure 8-21 is described as follows: 1. or release a physical channel. If an Iur data transport bearer fails to be set up. l Physical Channel Reconfiguration Procedure The physical channel reconfiguration procedure is performed to set up. l If the Iur data transport bearers are set up. Procedure Figure 8-22 shows the physical channel reconfiguration procedure. 2. Triggering Conditions The SRNC sends a PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION message. the DRNC sends a QAAL2 ESTABLISH RELEASE CONFIRM message. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . Ltd. The DRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to send a response message to the SRNC. 8-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The SRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to send a QAAL2 ESTABLISH REQUEST message to the DRNC. the DRNC sends a QAAL2 ESTABLISH CONFIRM message. reconfigure..8 Inter-Frequency Handover Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Procedure Figure 8-21 shows the Iur user plane setup procedure.

The UE saves the IEs of the UE. The UE sends a response message to the SRNC. Triggering Conditions The CRNC sends a RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST message. If failing to reconfigure the physical channels specified by the PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION message. transport channel.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 8 Inter-Frequency Handover Procedure Figure 8-22 Physical channel reconfiguration procedure The procedure shown in Figure 8-22 is described as follows: 1.. the UE restores the configuration to the old physical channel configuration and sends a PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION FAILURE message on the DCCH by using AM RLC. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The SRNC sends a PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION message to the UE to request reconfiguration of a physical channel. l Radio Link Deletion Procedure The radio link deletion procedure is performed to release resources in a NodeB for one or more established radio links towards a UE. the UE sends a PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION COMPLETE message on the uplink DCCH by using AM RLC. and physical channel. 3. 2. The value of the Failure cause IE contained in the PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION FAILURE message is "physical channel failure". Radio Bearer (RB). l If successfully reconfiguring the physical channels specified by the PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION message. Ltd. Procedure Figure 8-23 shows the radio link deletion procedure. 8-21 .

Ltd. l If all the radio links are deleted. 2. Procedure Figure 8-24 shows the Iub user plane release procedure. The Criticality Diagnostics field in the message indicates the failure cause. the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK DELETION RESPONSE message. the NodeB deletes the radio links specified by the message. The CRNC sends a RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST message to the NodeB. the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK DELETION RESPONSE message. Triggering Conditions The transport channels on the Iub user plane need to be removed. After receiving the message. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . The NodeB sends a response message to the CRNC. l Iub User Plane Release Procedure The Iub user plane release procedure is performed to release data transport bearers from the Iub interface.8 Inter-Frequency Handover Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Figure 8-23 Radio link deletion procedure The procedure shown in Figure 8-23 is described as follows: 1. If any radio link fails to be deleted. 8-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..

l Iur User Plane Release Procedure The Iur user plane release procedure is performed to release data transport bearers from the Iur interface. 2. Procedure Figure 8-25 shows the Iur user plane release procedure. 8-23 . the NodeB sends a QAAL2 RELEASE CONFIRM message to confirm the release. The CRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to send a QAAL2 RELEASE REQUEST message to the NodeB. Triggering Conditions The transport channels on the Iur user plane need to be removed. If an Iub data transport bearer fails to be released. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The NodeB uses the ALCAP protocol to send a response message to the CRNC.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 8 Inter-Frequency Handover Procedure Figure 8-24 Iub user plane release procedure The procedure shown in Figure 8-24 is described as follows: 1. Ltd.. the NodeB sends a QAAL2 RELEASE CONFIRM message that indicates the failure cause. l If the Iub data transport bearers are released.

The SRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to send a QAAL2 RELEASE REQUEST message to the DRNC. If an Iur data transport bearer fails to be released. l If the Iur data transport bearers are released. Ltd. The DRNC uses the ALCAP protocol to send a response message to the SRNC. l 8-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the DRNC sends a QAAL2 RELEASE CONFIRM message that indicates the failure cause.8 Inter-Frequency Handover Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Figure 8-25 Iur user plane release procedure The procedure shown in Figure 8-25 is described as follows: 1. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . the DRNC sends a QAAL2 RELEASE CONFIRM message to confirm the release.. 2.

signaling procedure of a successful inter-RAT handover.1 Types of Inter-RAT Handover Based on the direction of handover. triggering conditions. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3 Inter-RAT CS Handover from GSM to WCDMA The procedure of inter-RAT CS handover from GSM to WCDMA is performed to hand over the CS services of a UE from the GSM system to the WCDMA system.. This topic describes inter-RAT handover in terms of types. triggering conditions. inter-RAT handovers are categorized into two types: interRAT handover from WCDMA to GSM and inter-RAT handover from GSM to WCDMA. Ltd. This topic also describes the elementary procedures in terms of functions. 9-1 . and signaling in normal and abnormal conditions.2 Inter-RAT CS Handover from WCDMA to GSM The procedure of inter-RAT CS handover from WCDMA to GSM is performed to hand over the CS services of a UE from the WCDMA system to the GSM system. 9.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 9 Inter-RAT Handover Procedure 9 About This Chapter Inter-RAT Handover Procedure The inter-RAT handover procedure is performed to hand over a UE from a WCDMA cell to a GSM cell or the other way round.5 Inter-RAT PS Handover from GSM to WCDMA The procedure of inter-RAT PS handover from GSM to WCDMA is performed through cell reselection to WCDMA that is initiated by the UE. and signaling tracing on the RNC LMT. 9. 9. protocols. 9.4 Inter-RAT PS Handover from WCDMA to GSM The procedure of inter-RAT PS handover from WCDMA to GSM is performed to hand over the PS services of a UE from the WCDMA system to the GSM system. 9.

3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Inter-RAT CS Handover from WCDMA to GSM This describes the signaling procedure of a successful inter-RAT CS handover from WCDMA to GSM..2. 9.413 "UTRAN Iu interface RANAP signalling" 3GPP TS25. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) 9-2 .331 "Radio Resource Control (RRC)" 3GPP TS25.433 "UTRAN Iub interface Node B Application Part (NBAP) signalling" Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 9.9 Inter-RAT Handover Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 9.2.2. 9.2 Triggering Conditions of Inter-RAT CS Handover from WCDMA to GSM The signal quality of the WCDMA cell that the UE camps on is dissatisfactory or the load of the serving cell is heavy.2. For the messages related to handover failures. 9.1 Protocols Related to Inter-RAT CS Handover from WCDMA to GSM The procedure of inter-RAT CS handover from WCDMA to GSM complies with some 3GPP TS25 protocols.1 Protocols Related to Inter-RAT CS Handover from WCDMA to GSM The procedure of inter-RAT CS handover from WCDMA to GSM complies with some 3GPP TS25 protocols. 9. Ltd.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Inter-RAT CS Handover from WCDMA to GSM The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure of an inter-RAT CS handover from WCDMA to GSM.2. inter-RAT handovers are categorized into two types: interRAT handover from WCDMA to GSM and inter-RAT handover from GSM to WCDMA. The compliance protocols are as follows: l l l 3GPP TS25. 9.1 Types of Inter-RAT Handover Based on the direction of handover. inter-RAT handovers from WCDMA to GSM and those from GSM to WCDMA are further categorized into the following types: l l l l Inter-RAT CS handover from WCDMA to GSM Inter-RAT PS handover from WCDMA to GSM Inter-RAT CS handover from GSM to WCDMA Inter-RAT PS handover from GSM to WCDMA 9.2 Inter-RAT CS Handover from WCDMA to GSM The procedure of inter-RAT CS handover from WCDMA to GSM is performed to hand over the CS services of a UE from the WCDMA system to the GSM system.5 Elementary Procedures of Inter-RAT CS Handover from WCDMA to GSM This describes the elementary procedures of inter-RAT CS handover from WCDMA to GSM in terms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions. Based on domains. refer to the elementary procedures.2.

2.2 Triggering Conditions of Inter-RAT CS Handover from WCDMA to GSM The signal quality of the WCDMA cell that the UE camps on is dissatisfactory or the load of the serving cell is heavy. if the signal quality of a neighboring GSM cell is satisfactory and its load is relatively light. Figure 9-1 shows the signaling procedure of a successful inter-RAT CS handover from WCDMA to GSM.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 9 Inter-RAT Handover Procedure 9.2. 9. The message contains the RAB ID..3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Inter-RAT CS Handover from WCDMA to GSM This describes the signaling procedure of a successful inter-RAT CS handover from WCDMA to GSM. Figure 9-1 Signaling procedure of a successful inter-RAT CS handover from WCDMA to GSM Note the following information about the procedure shown in Figure 9-1: l This figure presents only a brief of the signaling between the MSC server and the MSC (GSM) and that between the MSC (GSM) and the BSC (GSM). For the messages related to handover failures. The SRNC sends a HANDOVER FROM UTRAN COMMAND message to the UE. and the GSM information in bit strings. Ltd. refer to the elementary procedures. the UE will be handed over from the WCDMA cell to the GSM cell. In such a condition. the GSM frequency. 9-3 l Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the activation time.

You are logged in to the RNC as a user authorized to perform tracing management. Context Table 9-1 lists the messages to be traced. Ltd.9 Inter-RAT Handover Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 9.2. Figure 9-2 Example of Uu signaling tracing result 9-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Figure 9-2 shows an example of Uu signaling tracing result.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Inter-RAT CS Handover from WCDMA to GSM The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure of an inter-RAT CS handover from WCDMA to GSM. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . Prerequisite l l The RNC LMT works properly.. Table 9-1 Messages to be traced Interface and Protocol to Be Traced Message Name on the LMT RRC_HO_FROM_UTRAN_C MD_GSM RRC_HO_FROM_UTRAN_F AIL NBAP_RL_DEL_REQ NBAP_RL_DEL_RSP RANAP_RELOCATION_RE QUIRED RANAP_RELOCATION_CO MMAND Iu RANAP_RELOCATION_PR EPARATION_FAILURE RANAP_IU_RELEASE_CO MMAND RANAP_IU_RELEASE_CO MPLETE Message Name in Protocols HANDOVER FROM UTRAN COMMAND HANDOVER FROM UTRAN FAILURE RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST RADIO LINK DELETION RESPONSE RELOCATION REQUIRED RELOCATION COMMAND RELOCATION PREPARATION FAILURE IU RELEASE COMMAND IU RELEASE COMPLETE Uu Iub Procedure Step 1 Create a Uu tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.

Triggering Conditions The relocation preparation procedure can be triggered in either of the following conditions: Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.2..5.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 9 Inter-RAT Handover Procedure Step 2 Create an Iub tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task. 9.1 Relocation Preparation Procedure The relocation preparation procedure is performed to prepare resources for relocation of the SRNS. Figure 9-3 Example of Iub signaling tracing result Step 3 Create an Iu tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.2 Iu Release Procedure The Iu release procedure is performed for the CN to release an Iu connection and all the UTRAN resources related only to that Iu connection. Relocation Preparation Procedure The relocation preparation procedure is performed to prepare resources for relocation of the SRNS. 9-5 . Figure 9-3 shows an example of Iub signaling tracing result. Ltd.5 Elementary Procedures of Inter-RAT CS Handover from WCDMA to GSM This describes the elementary procedures of inter-RAT CS handover from WCDMA to GSM in terms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions.2.5.3 Radio Link Deletion Procedure The radio link deletion procedure is performed to release resources in a NodeB for one or more established radio links towards a UE.5. Figure 9-4 Example of Iu signaling tracing result ----End 9.2. Figure 9-4 shows an example of Iu signaling tracing result. 9.2. 9.

The message contains the L3 information IE. the CN sends a RELOCATION COMMAND message when the preparation is complete. The SRNC sends a RELOCATION REQUIRED message to the CN. l Iu Release Procedure The Iu release procedure is performed for the CN to release an Iu connection and all the UTRAN resources related only to that Iu connection. the CN sends a RELOCATION PREPARATION FAILURE message. 9-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The message contains certain information such as relocation type. Ltd. During an inter-RAT CS handover from WCDMA to GSM. If the resources partially or totally fail to be allocated. The CN interacts with the target RNC or the target network system. The CN sends a response message to the SRNC. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . which carries the information about the relevant resources allocated by the target RNC or the target network system. such as the GSM system. Procedure Figure 9-5 shows the relocation preparation procedure. relocation cause. l 2. If the target RNC or the target network system prepares the relevant resources successfully. to prepare relevant resources. source LAC. and target LAC.9 Inter-RAT Handover Procedure l l RAN Signalling Analysis Guide During an SRNS relocation. Figure 9-5 Relocation preparation procedure The procedure shown in Figure 9-5 is described as follows: 1. the SRNC sends a RELOCATION REQUIRED message. source PLMN. target PLMN. source SAC. the SRNC sends a RELOCATION REQUIRED message. 3..

. the CN will not send further RANAP connection-oriented messages on this particular connection. for example. The SRNS relocation is canceled after a relocation resource allocation procedure is complete. The UTRAN requests the CN to release the resources on the Iu interface by. Radio Link Deletion Procedure The radio link deletion procedure is performed to release resources in a NodeB for one or more established radio links towards a UE. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The message indicates the cause for the release of the signaling connection. NOTE After sending the IU RELEASE COMMAND message. Figure 9-6 Iu release procedure The procedure shown in Figure 9-6 is described as follows: 1. sending an IU RELEASE REQUEST message. Ltd. The Serving Radio Network Subsystem (SRNS) is relocated. l l Procedure Figure 9-6 shows the Iu release procedure. 9-7 . Triggering Conditions The CRNC sends a RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST message.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 9 Inter-RAT Handover Procedure Triggering Conditions The Iu release procedure can be triggered in one of the following conditions: l l The transaction between the UE and the CN is complete. The CN sends an IU RELEASE COMMAND message to the SRNC to initiate the Iu release procedure. 2. The SRNC releases the related UTRAN resources and then sends an IU RELEASE COMPLETE message to the CN.

3 Inter-RAT CS Handover from GSM to WCDMA The procedure of inter-RAT CS handover from GSM to WCDMA is performed to hand over the CS services of a UE from the GSM system to the WCDMA system. 9. 9. l If all the radio links are deleted.3.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Inter-RAT CS Handover from GSM to WCDMA This describes the signaling procedure of a successful inter-RAT CS handover from GSM to WCDMA.3. 9. The Criticality Diagnostics field in the message indicates the failure cause. 2. If any radio link fails to be deleted. Ltd. The CRNC sends a RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST message to the NodeB. The NodeB sends a response message to the CRNC.3. the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK DELETION RESPONSE message. After receiving the message. 9.1 Protocols Related to Inter-RAT CS Handover from GSM to WCDMA The procedure of inter-RAT CS handover from GSM to WCDMA complies with some 3GPP TS25 protocols. l 9. the NodeB deletes the radio links specified by the message.9 Inter-RAT Handover Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Procedure Figure 9-7 shows the radio link deletion procedure. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . For the messages related to handover failures. refer to the elementary procedures. Figure 9-7 Radio link deletion procedure The procedure shown in Figure 9-7 is described as follows: 1.3.2 Triggering Conditions of Inter-RAT CS Handover from GSM to WCDMA The signal quality of the GSM cell that the UE camps on is dissatisfactory or the load of the serving cell is heavy..4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Inter-RAT CS Handover from GSM to WCDMA 9-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK DELETION RESPONSE message.

9. Figure 9-8 shows the signaling procedure of a successful inter-RAT CS handover from GSM to WCDMA.3.3.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Inter-RAT CS Handover from GSM to WCDMA This describes the signaling procedure of a successful inter-RAT CS handover from GSM to WCDMA. The compliance protocols are as follows: l l l 3GPP TS25. 9. For the messages related to handover failures.1 Protocols Related to Inter-RAT CS Handover from GSM to WCDMA The procedure of inter-RAT CS handover from GSM to WCDMA complies with some 3GPP TS25 protocols.433 "UTRAN Iub interface Node B Application Part (NBAP) signalling" 9.413 "UTRAN Iu interface RANAP signalling" 3GPP TS25. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.331 "Radio Resource Control (RRC)" 3GPP TS25.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 9 Inter-RAT Handover Procedure The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure of an inter-RAT CS handover from GSM to WCDMA.5 Elementary Procedures of Inter-RAT CS Handover from GSM to WCDMA This describes the elementary procedures of inter-RAT CS handover from GSM to WCDMA in terms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions. 9. the UE will be handed over from the GSM cell to the WCDMA cell. 9-9 . if the signal quality of a neighboring WCDMA cell is satisfactory and its load is relatively light.2 Triggering Conditions of Inter-RAT CS Handover from GSM to WCDMA The signal quality of the GSM cell that the UE camps on is dissatisfactory or the load of the serving cell is heavy. In such a condition.3. refer to the elementary procedures. Ltd..3.

After receiving a RADIO LINK RESTORE INDICATION message. In addition. Ltd. the RNC sends a RELOCATION COMPLETE message to the MSC server. After receiving a HANDOVER TO UTRAN COMPLETE message. If the handover fails. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) l l l l 9-10 . In practice.. the signaling messages traced may differ from the signaling message shown in the figure in terms of the sequence. After the UE is handed over.9 Inter-RAT Handover Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Figure 9-8 Signaling procedure of a successful inter-RAT CS handover from GSM to WCDMA Note the following information about the procedure shown in Figure 9-8: l This figure presents only a brief of the signaling between the MSC server and the MSC (GSM) and that between the MSC (GSM) and the BSC (GSM). and the security mode control procedure. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the RNC sends a RELOCATION DETECT message to the MSC server to inform the MSC server that the UE has been handed over from GSM to WCDMA. the UE reports the failure to the GSM system. the RNC controls the UE to perform the UTRAN mobility information procedure. the UE capability enquiry procedure. it sends a HANDOVER TO UTRAN COMPLETE message to the RNC.

3.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 9 Inter-RAT Handover Procedure 9.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Inter-RAT CS Handover from GSM to WCDMA The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure of an inter-RAT CS handover from GSM to WCDMA.. . You are logged in to the RNC as a user authorized to perform tracing management. Table 9-2 Messages to be traced Interface and Protocol to Be Traced Message Name on the LMT RRC_HO_UTRAN_CMP RRC_UTRAN_MOBIL_INF O RRC_UTRAN_MOBIL_INF O_CONFIRM RRC_UTRAN_MOBIL_INF O_FAILURE RRC_UE_CAP_ENQUIRY Uu RRC_UE_CAP_INFO RRC_UE_CAP_INFO_CONF IRM RRC_SECURITY_MODE_C MD RRC_SECURITY_MODE_C MP RRC_SECURITY_MODE_F AIL NBAP_RL_SETUP_REQ Iub NBAP_RL_SETUP_RSP RNSAP_RL_SETUP_FAIL NBAP_RL_RESTORE_IND Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Message Name in Protocols HANDOVER TO UTRAN COMPLETE UTRAN MOBILITY INFORMATION UTRAN MOBILITY INFORMATION CONFIRM UTRAN MOBILITY INFORMATION FAILURE UE CAPABILITY ENQUIRY UE CAPABILITY INFORMATION UE CAPABILITY INFORMATION CONFIRM SECURITY MODE COMMAND SECURITY MODE COMPLETE SECURITY MODE FAILURE RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST RADIO LINK SETUP RESPONSE RADIO LINK SETUP FAILURE RADIO LINK RESTORE INDICATION 9-11 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Prerequisite l l The RNC LMT works properly. Context Table 9-2 lists the messages to be traced. Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25) .. Figure 9-11 shows an example of Iu signaling tracing result. Ltd. Figure 9-11 Example of Iu signaling tracing result 9-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.9 Inter-RAT Handover Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Interface and Protocol to Be Traced Message Name on the LMT RANAP_RELOCATION_RE Q RANAP_RELOCATION_RE Q_ACK Message Name in Protocols RELOCATION REQUEST RELOCATION REQUEST ACKNOWLEDGE RELOCATION FAILURE RELOCATION DECTECT RELOCATION COMPLETE Iu RANAP_RELOCATION_FAI LURE RANAP_RELOCATION_DE TECT RANAP_RELOCATION_CO MPLETE Procedure Step 1 Create a Uu tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task. Figure 9-10 shows an example of Iub signaling tracing result. Figure 9-9 Example of Uu signaling tracing result Step 2 Create an Iub tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task. Figure 9-9 shows an example of Uu signaling tracing result. Figure 9-10 Example of Iub signaling tracing result Step 3 Create an Iu tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.

9.3.6 UTRAN Mobility Information Procedure The UTRAN mobility information procedure is performed for the network to allocate a new UTRAN Radio Network Temporary Identifier (U-RNTI) or Cell Radio Network Temporary Identifier (C-RNTI) to a UE or to inform the UE of mobility-related information such as timer values and CN domain–related information. 9. 9. the CN applies for resources from the target RNC.5.5.5.2 Radio Link Setup Procedure (Intra-RNC Handover or GSM to WCDMA CS Handover) The radio link setup procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover) is performed to set up a radio link in an SRNC-controlled NodeB for a UE.3. Ltd.1 Relocation Resource Allocation Procedure The relocation resource allocation procedure is performed to allocate resources from the target RNS for an SRNS relocation.4 UE Capability Enquiry Procedure The UE capability enquiry procedure is performed to request a UE to transmit its capability information related to any radio access network so that the network can perform data configuration based on the UE capability. the CN applies for resources from the target RNC.3. Triggering Conditions The relocation resource allocation procedure can be triggered in either of the following conditions: l l During an SRNS relocation.3.5 Elementary Procedures of Inter-RAT CS Handover from GSM to WCDMA This describes the elementary procedures of inter-RAT CS handover from GSM to WCDMA in terms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions.5.5.3. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 9. 9. During an inter-RAT CS handover from GSM to WCDMA.3 Radio Link Restoration Procedure (Intra-RNC Handover or GSM to WCDMA CS Handover) The radio link restoration procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover) is performed for a NodeB to notify the CRNC that the uplink synchronization of one or more radio links is achieved or re-achieved.5. 9.3.5 Security Mode Control Procedure The security mode control procedure is performed to configure or reconfigure one or both of the ciphering algorithm and the integrity protection algorithm for a UE.. Relocation Resource Allocation Procedure The relocation resource allocation procedure is performed to allocate resources from the target RNS for an SRNS relocation. 9-13 .3.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 9 Inter-RAT Handover Procedure ----End 9.

The parameters include the UTRAN Radio Network Temporary Identifier (U-RNTI).. chosen encryption algorithm. The message contains certain information. CN domain indicator. If the resources partially or totally fail to be allocated or the target RNC rejects the SRNS relocation for some reason. indicating the failure cause. The target RNC allocates radio resources for the relocation. integrity protection. handover cause.9 Inter-RAT Handover Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Procedure Figure 9-12 shows the relocation resource allocation procedure. If the resources are allocated. Triggering Conditions The CRNC sends a RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message. The CN sends a RELOCATION REQUEST message to the target RNC. Ltd. 3. such as the IMSI of the UE. the target RNC sends a RELOCATION FAILURE message. target cell identifier. Figure 9-12 Relocation resource allocation procedure The procedure shown in Figure 9-12 is described as follows: 1. RAB. The message contains the radio resources and other parameters allocated to the UE. l 2. Iu signaling connection ID. l Radio Link Setup Procedure (Intra-RNC Handover or GSM to WCDMA CS Handover) The radio link setup procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover) is performed to set up a radio link in an SRNC-controlled NodeB for a UE. the target RNC sends a RELOCATION REQUEST ACKNOWLEDGE message. and RAB parameters. 9-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. encryption. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . The target RNC sends a response message to the CN. transport layer and physical layer information. and chosen integrity protection algorithm.

That is..RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 9 Inter-RAT Handover Procedure Procedure Figure 9-13 shows the radio link setup procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover). Triggering Conditions The NodeB detects UL signals from the UE. l 2. If the radio link fails to be set up. l Radio Link Restoration Procedure (Intra-RNC Handover or GSM to WCDMA CS Handover) The radio link restoration procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover) is performed for a NodeB to notify the CRNC that the uplink synchronization of one or more radio links is achieved or re-achieved. 9-15 . The NodeB sends a response message to the CRNC. Figure 9-13 Radio link setup procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover) The procedure shown in Figure 9-13 is described as follows: 1. the NodeB reserves the necessary resources and configures the new radio link according to the parameters given in the message. Ltd. the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK SETUP FAILURE message. Procedure Figure 9-14 shows the radio link restoration procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover). The message contains the failure cause. After receiving the message. If the radio link is set up. the NodeB saves the value of the Configuration Generation ID IE contained in the RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message and sends a RADIO LINK SETUP RESPONSE message. the NodeB finishes UL synchronization with the UE. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The CRNC sends a RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message to the NodeB.

. Procedure Figure 9-15 shows the UE capability enquiry procedure.9 Inter-RAT Handover Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Figure 9-14 Radio link restoration procedure (intra-RNC handover or GSM to WCDMA CS handover) After performing UL synchronization with the UE. Ltd. UE Capability Enquiry Procedure The UE capability enquiry procedure is performed to request a UE to transmit its capability information related to any radio access network so that the network can perform data configuration based on the UE capability. Figure 9-15 UE capability enquiry procedure The procedure shown in Figure 9-15 is described as follows: 9-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . Triggering Conditions The UTRAN sends a UE CAPABILITY ENQUIRY message to acquire the UE capability information related to any radio access network. the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK RESTORE INDICATION message to the CRNC.

. If the SECURITY MODE COMMAND message contains neither Ciphering mode info IE nor Integrity protection mode info IE or if each of the two IEs has inconsistent Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the SRNC starts or reconfigures one or both of the ciphering and integrity protection configurations for the RBs or one CN domain and for all Signaling Radio Bearers (SRBs). The UE sends a response message to the SRNC. Security Mode Control Procedure The security mode control procedure is performed to configure or reconfigure one or both of the ciphering algorithm and the integrity protection algorithm for a UE. Ltd. 3. The UE sends a UE CAPABILITY INFORMATION message to the SRNC through the uplink DCCH using AM or UM RLC. Procedure Figure 9-16 shows the security mode control procedure. 2. 9-17 l Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . The SRNC sends a UE CAPABILITY ENQUIRY message to the UE through the downlink DCCH using AM RLC. Triggering Conditions The ciphering algorithm or the integrity protection algorithm has changed. Figure 9-16 Security mode control procedure The procedure shown in Figure 9-16 is described as follows: 1. The message contains the information about UE capabilities. Through a SECURITY MODE COMMAND message sent to the UE. l 2. The SRNC reads the UE capability information and then sends a UE CAPABILITY INFORMA CONFIRM message to the UE through the downlink DCCH using AM or UM RLC. If the UE completes configuring or reconfiguring the relevant parameters for one or both of the ciphering and integrity protection algorithms. the UE sends a SECURITY MODE COMPLETE message to inform the SRNC of the completion.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 9 Inter-RAT Handover Procedure 1.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Figure 9-17 UTRAN mobility information procedure The procedure shown in Figure 9-17 is described as follows: 1. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) l 9-18 . UTRAN Mobility Information Procedure The UTRAN mobility information procedure is performed for the network to allocate a new UTRAN Radio Network Temporary Identifier (U-RNTI) or Cell Radio Network Temporary Identifier (C-RNTI) to a UE or to inform the UE of mobility-related information such as timer values and CN domain–related information. The UE sends a response message to the SRNC. Triggering Conditions The SRNC sends a UTRAN MOBILITY INFORMATION message to the UE. 3. If the UE fails to conduct the operations specified by the UTRAN MOBILITY INFORMATION message. the UE sends a SECURITY MODE FAILURE message.9 Inter-RAT Handover Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide information. indicating the failure of the security mode control procedure as well as the failure cause. The UE starts to update the related fields according to the values of the IEs carried in the message. the UE sends a UTRAN MOBILITY INFORMATION FAILURE message. The SRNC sends a UTRAN MOBILITY INFORMATION message to the UE. Procedure Figure 9-17 shows the UTRAN mobility information procedure.. indicating the failure cause. the UE sends a UTRAN MOBILITY INFORMATION CONFIRM message. Ltd. l If the UE succeeds in conducting the operations specified by the UTRAN MOBILITY INFORMATION message. 2.

9.4. 9.2 Triggering Conditions of Inter-RAT PS Handover from WCDMA to GSM The signal quality of the WCDMA cell that the UE camps on is dissatisfactory or the load of the serving cell is heavy.4. the UTRAN sends a CELL CHANGE ORDER message to the UE to perform a handover to GSM. 9.433 "UTRAN Iub interface Node B Application Part (NBAP) signalling" 9..4. URA_PCH.1 Protocols Related to Inter-RAT PS Handover from WCDMA to GSM The procedure of inter-RAT PS handover from WCDMA to GSM complies with some 3GPP TS25 protocols.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Inter-RAT PS Handover from WCDMA to GSM The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure of an inter-RAT PS handover from WCDMA to GSM. l Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 9.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 9 Inter-RAT Handover Procedure 9.4. For the messages related to handover failures. When the UE is in CELL_DCH state. 9-19 .3 Signaling Procedure of Successful Inter-RAT PS Handover from WCDMA to GSM This describes the signaling procedure of a successful inter-RAT PS handover from WCDMA to GSM.413 "UTRAN Iu interface RANAP signalling" 3GPP TS25.2 Triggering Conditions of Inter-RAT PS Handover from WCDMA to GSM The signal quality of the WCDMA cell that the UE camps on is dissatisfactory or the load of the serving cell is heavy.4. 9.5 Elementary Procedures of Inter-RAT PS Handover from WCDMA to GSM This describes the elementary procedures of inter-RAT PS handover from WCDMA to GSM in terms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions. Ltd.1 Protocols Related to Inter-RAT PS Handover from WCDMA to GSM The procedure of inter-RAT PS handover from WCDMA to GSM complies with some 3GPP TS25 protocols.4 Inter-RAT PS Handover from WCDMA to GSM The procedure of inter-RAT PS handover from WCDMA to GSM is performed to hand over the PS services of a UE from the WCDMA system to the GSM system.331 "Radio Resource Control (RRC)" 3GPP TS25. 9.4.4. the UE initiates cell reselection to perform a handover to GSM. l When the UE is in CELL_PCH. refer to the elementary procedures. The compliance protocols are as follows: l l l 3GPP TS25. or CELL_FACH state.

the UE can initiate cell reselection to perform a handover to GSM.9 Inter-RAT Handover Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 9. Based on the parameters in the system information. This message.4. if the Packet Data Protocol (PDP) context does not need to be transferred. After the UE accesses a GSM cell. The SRNS context transfer is unnecessary to the procedure of inter-RAT PS handover from WCDMA to GSM. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) l l l 9-20 . After cell reselection to a GSM cell. is unnecessary to the procedure of inter-RAT PS handover from WCDMA to GSM. The cell reselection is initiated with an SRNS CONTEXT REQUEST message sent from the SGSN to SRNC. or URA_FACH state. the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK FAILURE INDICATION message because the UE stops the transmission towards the WCDMA cell. Ltd.3 Signaling Procedure of Successful Inter-RAT PS Handover from WCDMA to GSM This describes the signaling procedure of a successful inter-RAT PS handover from WCDMA to GSM. Figure 9-18 shows the signaling procedure of a successful inter-RAT PS handover from WCDMA to GSM. For the messages related to handover failures. the UE may be in CELL_PCH.. the SGSN directly sends an IU RELEASE COMMAND message to the SRNC. URA_PCH. refer to the elementary procedures. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. however. Figure 9-18 Signaling procedure of a successful inter-RAT PS handover from WCDMA to GSM Note the following information about the procedure shown in Figure 9-18: l When the PS data volume is low.

4. Prerequisite l l The RNC LMT works properly. Ltd. 9-21 . Context Table 9-3 lists the messages to be traced.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 9 Inter-RAT Handover Procedure 9. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Table 9-3 Messages to be traced Interface and Protocol to Be Traced Message Name on the LMT RRC_CELL_CHANGE_ORD ER_FROM_UTRAN RRC_CELL_CHANGE_ORD ER_FROM_UTRAN_FAIL NBAP_RL_FAIL_IND Iub NBAP_RL_DEL_REQ NBAP_RL_DEL_RSP RANAP_SRNS_CONTEXT_ REQ RANAP_SRNS_CONTEXT_ RESP Iu RANAP_SRNS_DATA_FOR WARD_COMMAND RANAP_IU_RELEASE_CO MMAND RANAP_IU_RELEASE_CO MPLETE Message Name in Protocols CELL CHANGE ORDER FROM UTRAN CELL CHANGE ORDER FROM UTRAN FAILURE RADIO LINK FAILURE INDICATION RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST RADIO LINK DELETION RESPONSE SRNS CONTEXT REQUEST SRNS CONTEXT RESPONSE SRNS DATA FORWARD COMMAND IU RELEASE COMMAND IU RELEASE COMPLETE Uu Procedure Step 1 Create a Uu tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task. You are logged in to the RNC as a user authorized to perform tracing management..4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Inter-RAT PS Handover from WCDMA to GSM The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure of an inter-RAT PS handover from WCDMA to GSM. Figure 9-19 shows an example of Uu signaling tracing result.

5 Elementary Procedures of Inter-RAT PS Handover from WCDMA to GSM This describes the elementary procedures of inter-RAT PS handover from WCDMA to GSM in terms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions.2 SRNS Context Transfer Procedure The SRNS context transfer procedure is performed to transfer SRNS contexts from the source RNC to the SGSN. Figure 9-20 shows an example of Iub signaling tracing result. Ltd.5.5.1 Cell Change Order from UTRAN Procedure The cell change order from UTRAN procedure is performed to hand over.4. 9.4 Radio Link Deletion Procedure The radio link deletion procedure is performed to release resources in a NodeB for one or more established radio links towards a UE. 9-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 9.5. Figure 9-21 shows an example of Iu signaling tracing result.4. under the control of the network.4. a UE in CELL_DCH state to a GSM cell when the RABs established in the WCDMA system are only from the PS domain.9 Inter-RAT Handover Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Figure 9-19 Example of Uu signaling tracing result Step 2 Create an Iub tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.5.3 Iu Release Procedure The Iu release procedure is performed for the CN to release an Iu connection and all the UTRAN resources related only to that Iu connection.4.. 9. 9. Figure 9-21 Example of Iu signaling tracing result ----End 9. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . Figure 9-20 Example of Iub signaling tracing result Step 3 Create an Iu tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.4.

Through a CELL CHANGE ORDER FROM UTRAN message.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 9 Inter-RAT Handover Procedure Cell Change Order from UTRAN Procedure The cell change order from UTRAN procedure is performed to hand over. a UE in CELL_DCH state to a GSM cell when the RABs established in the WCDMA system are only from the PS domain. Upon reception of the CELL CHANGE ORDER FROM UTRAN message. the procedure ends. the UE starts timer T309 and initiates access to the GSM cell. Ltd. 9-23 . l l 2. the UE sends a CELL CHANGE ORDER FROM UTRAN FAILURE message to the SRNC. Figure 9-22 Cell change order from UTRAN procedure The procedure shown in Figure 9-22 is described as follows: 1. Triggering Conditions The network decides to hand over the UE to the GSM system. If the UE fails to access the GSM cell before the timer expires. If the UE accesses the GSM cell before the timer expires.. SRNS Context Transfer Procedure The SRNS context transfer procedure is performed to transfer SRNS contexts from the source RNC to the SGSN. Band indicator. Procedure Figure 9-22 shows the cell change order from UTRAN procedure. the SRNC orders the UE to perform a cell change to the GSM system. and NC mode. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The IEs include BSIC. BCCH ARFCN. under the control of the network. The message contains certain IEs about the target cell.

2. If the SRNC fails to identify the ID of the RAB whose context should be transferred to the SGSN. The message includes the list of RABs whose contexts should be transferred.. the 2G equipment needs to get the PDP contexts of the UE from the 3G equipment.9 Inter-RAT Handover Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Triggering Conditions During the inter-RAT PS handover from WCDMA to GSM. Procedure Figure 9-23 shows the SRNS context transfer procedure. the message contains RAB IDs that include the sequence numbers for the downlink and uplink GTP PDUs and PDCP SDUs. Figure 9-23 SRNS context transfer procedure The procedure shown in Figure 9-23 is described as follows: 1. the SRNS CONTEXT RESPONSE message contains a Cause IE whose value is "Invalid RAB ID". l Iu Release Procedure The Iu release procedure is performed for the CN to release an Iu connection and all the UTRAN resources related only to that Iu connection. Triggering Conditions The Iu release procedure can be triggered in one of the following conditions: l The transaction between the UE and the CN is complete. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) 9-24 . The SRNC sends an SRNS CONTEXT RESPONSE message to the SGSN. The SGSN sends an SRNS CONTEXT REQUEST message to the SRNC. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. l If the transfer is successful.

RAN Signalling Analysis Guide
l

9 Inter-RAT Handover Procedure

The UTRAN requests the CN to release the resources on the Iu interface by, for example, sending an IU RELEASE REQUEST message. The Serving Radio Network Subsystem (SRNS) is relocated. The SRNS relocation is canceled after a relocation resource allocation procedure is complete.

l l

Procedure
Figure 9-24 shows the Iu release procedure. Figure 9-24 Iu release procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 9-24 is described as follows: 1. The CN sends an IU RELEASE COMMAND message to the SRNC to initiate the Iu release procedure. The message indicates the cause for the release of the signaling connection.
NOTE

After sending the IU RELEASE COMMAND message, the CN will not send further RANAP connection-oriented messages on this particular connection.

2.

The SRNC releases the related UTRAN resources and then sends an IU RELEASE COMPLETE message to the CN.

Radio Link Deletion Procedure
The radio link deletion procedure is performed to release resources in a NodeB for one or more established radio links towards a UE.

Triggering Conditions
The CRNC sends a RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST message.

Procedure
Figure 9-25 shows the radio link deletion procedure.
Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9-25

9 Inter-RAT Handover Procedure

RAN Signalling Analysis Guide

Figure 9-25 Radio link deletion procedure

The procedure shown in Figure 9-25 is described as follows: 1. 2. The CRNC sends a RADIO LINK DELETION REQUEST message to the NodeB. After receiving the message, the NodeB deletes the radio links specified by the message. The NodeB sends a response message to the CRNC.
l

If all the radio links are deleted, the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK DELETION RESPONSE message. If any radio link fails to be deleted, the NodeB sends a RADIO LINK DELETION RESPONSE message. The Criticality Diagnostics field in the message indicates the failure cause.

l

9.5 Inter-RAT PS Handover from GSM to WCDMA
The procedure of inter-RAT PS handover from GSM to WCDMA is performed through cell reselection to WCDMA that is initiated by the UE. For details, refer to 4 Location Update Procedure.

9-26

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

RAN Signalling Analysis Guide

10 SRNS Relocation Procedure

10
About This Chapter

SRNS Relocation Procedure

The SRNS relocation procedure is performed to change control from the SRNC of a UE to another RNC. This topic describes the SRNS relocation in terms of types, protocols, triggering conditions, signaling procedure of a successful SRNS relocation, and signaling tracing on the RNC LMT. This topic also describes the elementary procedures in terms of functions, triggering conditions, and signaling in normal and abnormal conditions. 10.1 Types of SRNS Relocation Based on whether the connection between the UE and the DRNC is set up during the relocation, SRNS relocation is categorized into two types: UE-not-involved relocation and UE-involved relocation. 10.2 Static Relocation The static relocation procedure is performed to change control from the SRNC of a UE to the DRNC. The relocation is triggered after a radio link is added to the DRNC for the UE. An Iur interface exists between the two RNCs involved in the relocation. 10.3 Relocation with Cell/URA Update The procedure of relocation with cell/URA update is performed to change control from the SRNC of a UE to the DRNC. The relocation is triggered by a cell update or URA update when the UE performs cell reselection to a cell in another RNC. 10.4 Relocation with Hard Handover The procedure of relocation with hard handover is performed to change control from the SRNC of a UE to the DRNC. The relocation is triggered when the UE performs an inter-RNC hard handover, which can be either an intra-frequency hard handover or an inter-frequency handover. No Iur interface exists between the two RNCs involved in the relocation. 10.5 DSCR Procedure When the Iur connection is missing, the RNC cannot contact the SRNC to verify the UE. As a result, the DSCR procedure is triggered, and the RNC sends the "RRC CONNECTION RELEASE" message.

Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-1

10 SRNS Relocation Procedure

RAN Signalling Analysis Guide

10.1 Types of SRNS Relocation
Based on whether the connection between the UE and the DRNC is set up during the relocation, SRNS relocation is categorized into two types: UE-not-involved relocation and UE-involved relocation. UE-not-involved reloaction:
l

Static relocation: The relocation is triggered after a radio link is added to the DRNC for the UE Relocation with cell/URA update: This type of relocation is triggered when the UE performs a cell reselection to a cell under an RNC between which and the SRNC no Iur interface exists.

l

UE-involved SRNS relocation :
l

Relocation with hard handover: An SRNS relocation is triggered when the UE performs an inter-RNC hard handover where no Iur interface exists between the two RNCs.

10.2 Static Relocation
The static relocation procedure is performed to change control from the SRNC of a UE to the DRNC. The relocation is triggered after a radio link is added to the DRNC for the UE. An Iur interface exists between the two RNCs involved in the relocation. 10.2.1 Protocols Related to Static Relocation The static relocation procedure complies with some 3GPP TS25 protocols. 10.2.2 Triggering Conditions of Static Relocation All the radio links connected to the UE exist only in the DRNC. 10.2.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Static Relocation This describes the signaling procedure of a successful static relocation. For the messages related to relocation failures, refer to the elementary procedures. 10.2.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Static Relocation Procedure The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure of a static relocation. 10.2.5 Elementary Procedures of Static Relocation This describes the elementary procedures of static relocation in terms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions.

10.2.1 Protocols Related to Static Relocation
The static relocation procedure complies with some 3GPP TS25 protocols. The compliance protocols are as follows:
l l l

3GPP TS25.331 "Radio Resource Control (RRC)" 3GPP TS25.413 "UTRAN Iu interface RANAP signalling" 3GPP TS25.423 "UTRAN Iur interface RNSAP signalling"
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2009-03-25)

10-2

RAN Signalling Analysis Guide

10 SRNS Relocation Procedure

10.2.2 Triggering Conditions of Static Relocation
All the radio links connected to the UE exist only in the DRNC. After a radio link is added to the DRNC for the UE, if all the radio links exist only in the DRNC between which and the SRNC an Iur interface is available, the SRNC initiates the static relocation procedure.

10.2.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Static Relocation
This describes the signaling procedure of a successful static relocation. For the messages related to relocation failures, refer to the elementary procedures. Figure 10-1 shows the signaling procedure of a successful static relocation. Figure 10-1 Signaling procedure of a successful static relocation

If the DRNC does not obtain the information about the UE capability, the DRNC initiates a UE capability enquiry procedure.

10.2.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Static Relocation Procedure
The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure of a static relocation.
Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10-3

Ltd.10 SRNS Relocation Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Prerequisite l l The RNC LMT works properly. Table 10-1 Messages to be traced on the SRNC Interface and Protocol to Be Traced Iur Message Name on the LMT RNSAP_RELOC_COMMIT RANAP_RELOCATION_REQU IRED RANAP_RELOCATION_COM MAND Iu RANAP_RELOCATION_PREP ARATION_FAILURE RANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMM AND RANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMP LETE Table 10-2 Messages to be traced on the DRNC Interface and Protocol to Be Traced Message Name on the LMT RRC_UTRAN_MOBIL_INF O RRC_UTRAN_MOBIL_INF O_CONFIRM Uu RRC_UTRAN_MOBIL_INF O_FAILURE RRC_UE_CAP_ENQUIRY RRC_UE_CAP_INFO RRC_UE_CAP_INFO_CONF IRM Iur RNSAP_RELOC_COMMIT Message Name in Protocols Message Name in Protocols RELOCATION COMMIT RELOCATION REQUIRED RELOCATION COMMAND RELOCATION PREPARATION FAILURE IU RELEASE COMMAND IU RELEASE COMPLETE UTRAN MOBILITY INFORMATION UTRAN MOBILITY INFORMATION CONFIRM UTRAN MOBILITY INFORMATION FAILURE UE CAPABILITY ENQUIRY UE CAPABILITY INFORMATION UE CAPABILITY INFORMATION CONFIRM RELOCATION COMMIT 10-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. You are logged in to the RNC as a user authorized to perform tracing management. Context Table 10-1 and Table 10-2 list the messages to be traced.. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) .

Figure 10-2 shows an example of Uu signaling tracing result. 10-5 . Figure 10-3 Example of Iur signaling tracing on the SRNC Figure 10-4 shows an example of Iur signaling tracing on the DRNC. Figure 10-3 shows an example of Iur signaling tracing on the SRNC.. Ltd. Figure 10-4 Example of Iur signaling tracing on the DRNC Step 3 Create an Iu tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 10 SRNS Relocation Procedure Interface and Protocol to Be Traced Message Name on the LMT RANAP_RELOCATION_RE Q RANAP_RELOCATION_RE Q_ACK Message Name in Protocols RELOCATION REQUEST RELOCATION REQUEST ACKNOWLEDGE RELOCATION FAILURE RELOCATION DETECT RELOCATION COMPLETE Iu RANAP_RELOCATION_FAI LURE RANAP_RELOCATION_DE TECT RANAP_RELOCATION_CO MPLETE Procedure Step 1 Create a Uu tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Figure 10-5 shows an example of Iu signaling tracing on the SRNC. Figure 10-2 Example of Uu signaling tracing result Step 2 Create an Iur tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.

2.5.5. 10-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.5 Elementary Procedures of Static Relocation This describes the elementary procedures of static relocation in terms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions. Ltd.2. 10.2.2.10 SRNS Relocation Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Figure 10-5 Example of Iu signaling tracing on the SRNC Figure 10-6 shows an example of Iu signaling tracing on the DRNC.2.5.2 Relocation Resource Allocation Procedure The relocation resource allocation procedure is performed to allocate resources from the target RNS for an SRNS relocation.5. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) .5. Figure 10-6 Example of Iu signaling tracing on the DRNC ----End 10.1 Relocation Preparation Procedure The relocation preparation procedure is performed to prepare resources for relocation of the SRNS. 10.6 Iu Release Procedure The Iu release procedure is performed for the CN to release an Iu connection and all the UTRAN resources related only to that Iu connection.5. 10.2. 10.3 Relocation Commit Procedure (Static Relocation or Relocation with Cell/URA Update) The relocation commit procedure is performed to execute the change of control from the SRNC of a UE to the DRNC.5 UE Capability Enquiry Procedure The UE capability enquiry procedure is performed to request a UE to transmit its capability information related to any radio access network so that the network can perform data configuration based on the UE capability. 10.2.4 UTRAN Mobility Information Procedure The UTRAN mobility information procedure is performed for the network to allocate a new UTRAN Radio Network Temporary Identifier (U-RNTI) or Cell Radio Network Temporary Identifier (C-RNTI) to a UE or to inform the UE of mobility-related information such as timer values and CN domain–related information.. 10.

Ltd. Procedure Figure 10-7 shows the relocation preparation procedure. The message contains certain information such as relocation type. source SAC. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. which carries the information about the relevant resources allocated by the target RNC or the target network system. The CN sends a response message to the SRNC. 10-7 Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . relocation cause. During an inter-RAT CS handover from WCDMA to GSM. The SRNC sends a RELOCATION REQUIRED message to the CN. Figure 10-7 Relocation preparation procedure The procedure shown in Figure 10-7 is described as follows: 1. The message contains the L3 information IE. The CN interacts with the target RNC or the target network system.. source PLMN. the SRNC sends a RELOCATION REQUIRED message. and target LAC. such as the GSM system. Triggering Conditions The relocation preparation procedure can be triggered in either of the following conditions: l l During an SRNS relocation. 3. target PLMN. the CN sends a RELOCATION COMMAND message when the preparation is complete. the SRNC sends a RELOCATION REQUIRED message. to prepare relevant resources. source LAC. l 2.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 10 SRNS Relocation Procedure Relocation Preparation Procedure The relocation preparation procedure is performed to prepare resources for relocation of the SRNS. If the target RNC or the target network system prepares the relevant resources successfully.

. the CN applies for resources from the target RNC. handover cause. If the resources are allocated. encryption. target cell identifier. CN domain indicator. Relocation Resource Allocation Procedure The relocation resource allocation procedure is performed to allocate resources from the target RNS for an SRNS relocation. During an inter-RAT CS handover from GSM to WCDMA. and RAB parameters. The message contains certain information. Figure 10-8 Relocation resource allocation procedure The procedure shown in Figure 10-8 is described as follows: 1. such as the IMSI of the UE. Ltd. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) 10-8 . The target RNC allocates radio resources for the relocation. Triggering Conditions The relocation resource allocation procedure can be triggered in either of the following conditions: l l During an SRNS relocation.10 SRNS Relocation Procedure l RAN Signalling Analysis Guide If the resources partially or totally fail to be allocated. l 2. 3. The CN sends a RELOCATION REQUEST message to the target RNC. integrity protection. Procedure Figure 10-8 shows the relocation resource allocation procedure. The message contains the radio resources and other Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the CN applies for resources from the target RNC. The target RNC sends a response message to the CN. the CN sends a RELOCATION PREPARATION FAILURE message. the target RNC sends a RELOCATION REQUEST ACKNOWLEDGE message. Iu signaling connection ID.

The DRNC sends a RELOCATION DETECT message to the CN to notify the CN of the detection of the relocation commitment. 10-9 2. the RELOCATION COMMIT message carries the GTP-U and PDCP sequence numbers required for data forwarding.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 10 SRNS Relocation Procedure parameters allocated to the UE. Ltd. The SRNC sends a RELOCATION COMMIT message to the DRNC. and chosen integrity protection algorithm. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . the SRNC initiates data forwarding. The parameters include the UTRAN Radio Network Temporary Identifier (U-RNTI). Relocation Commit Procedure (Static Relocation or Relocation with Cell/URA Update) The relocation commit procedure is performed to execute the change of control from the SRNC of a UE to the DRNC. If an RAB supporting lossless SRNS relocation is available on the Iu-PS interface. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the target RNC sends a RELOCATION FAILURE message. transport layer and physical layer information. l If the resources partially or totally fail to be allocated or the target RNC rejects the SRNS relocation for some reason. RAB.. Triggering Conditions The CN sends a RELOCATION COMMAND message to the SRNC. chosen encryption algorithm. Procedure Figure 10-9 shows the relocation commit procedure for the static relocation or relocation with cell/URA update. Then. Figure 10-9 Relocation commit procedure (static relocation or relocation with cell/URA update) The procedure shown in Figure 10-9 is described as follows: 1. indicating the failure cause.

10 SRNS Relocation Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 3. The UE sends a response message to the SRNC. UTRAN Mobility Information Procedure The UTRAN mobility information procedure is performed for the network to allocate a new UTRAN Radio Network Temporary Identifier (U-RNTI) or Cell Radio Network Temporary Identifier (C-RNTI) to a UE or to inform the UE of mobility-related information such as timer values and CN domain–related information. indicating the failure cause. Ltd. The UE starts to update the related fields according to the values of the IEs carried in the message. Triggering Conditions The SRNC sends a UTRAN MOBILITY INFORMATION message to the UE. The original DRNC sends a RELOCATION COMPLETE message to the CN to notify that the relocation is successful. l If the UE succeeds in conducting the operations specified by the UTRAN MOBILITY INFORMATION message. 2. the UE sends a UTRAN MOBILITY INFORMATION CONFIRM message. The SRNC sends a UTRAN MOBILITY INFORMATION message to the UE. Procedure Figure 10-10 shows the UTRAN mobility information procedure. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If the UE fails to conduct the operations specified by the UTRAN MOBILITY INFORMATION message.. the UE sends a UTRAN MOBILITY INFORMATION FAILURE message. Figure 10-10 UTRAN mobility information procedure The procedure shown in Figure 10-10 is described as follows: 1. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) l 10-10 . 3.

Procedure Figure 10-11 shows the UE capability enquiry procedure. The message contains the information about UE capabilities. Figure 10-11 UE capability enquiry procedure The procedure shown in Figure 10-11 is described as follows: 1. 3. 10-11 . 2. Iu Release Procedure The Iu release procedure is performed for the CN to release an Iu connection and all the UTRAN resources related only to that Iu connection. The UE sends a UE CAPABILITY INFORMATION message to the SRNC through the uplink DCCH using AM or UM RLC. Triggering Conditions The Iu release procedure can be triggered in one of the following conditions: Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The SRNC reads the UE capability information and then sends a UE CAPABILITY INFORMA CONFIRM message to the UE through the downlink DCCH using AM or UM RLC. The SRNC sends a UE CAPABILITY ENQUIRY message to the UE through the downlink DCCH using AM RLC. Ltd. Triggering Conditions The UTRAN sends a UE CAPABILITY ENQUIRY message to acquire the UE capability information related to any radio access network..RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 10 SRNS Relocation Procedure UE Capability Enquiry Procedure The UE capability enquiry procedure is performed to request a UE to transmit its capability information related to any radio access network so that the network can perform data configuration based on the UE capability.

10. 10. the CN will not send further RANAP connection-oriented messages on this particular connection.3. l l Procedure Figure 10-12 shows the Iu release procedure.3. NOTE After sending the IU RELEASE COMMAND message. 2. The UTRAN requests the CN to release the resources on the Iu interface by. The relocation is triggered by a cell update or URA update when the UE performs cell reselection to a cell in another RNC.2 Triggering Conditions of Relocation with Cell/URA Update 10-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Figure 10-12 Iu release procedure The procedure shown in Figure 10-12 is described as follows: 1. Ltd. 10.3 Relocation with Cell/URA Update The procedure of relocation with cell/URA update is performed to change control from the SRNC of a UE to the DRNC.. The Serving Radio Network Subsystem (SRNS) is relocated. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . The message indicates the cause for the release of the signaling connection.1 Protocols Related to Relocation with Cell/URA Update The procedure of relocation with cell/URA update complies with some 3GPP TS25 protocols. for example. The SRNS relocation is canceled after a relocation resource allocation procedure is complete. The CN sends an IU RELEASE COMMAND message to the SRNC to initiate the Iu release procedure. The SRNC releases the related UTRAN resources and then sends an IU RELEASE COMPLETE message to the CN.10 SRNS Relocation Procedure l l RAN Signalling Analysis Guide The transaction between the UE and the CN is complete. sending an IU RELEASE REQUEST message.

3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Relocation with Cell/ URA Update This describes the signaling procedure of a successful relocation with cell/URA update. 10.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 10 SRNS Relocation Procedure When the UE performs cell reselection to a cell in another RNC.3. The compliance protocols are as follows: l l l 3GPP TS25.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Relocation with Cell/URA Update The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure of a relocation with cell/URA update.1 Protocols Related to Relocation with Cell/URA Update The procedure of relocation with cell/URA update complies with some 3GPP TS25 protocols. Figure 10-13 shows the signaling procedure of a successful relocation with cell/URA update. a CCH cannot be set up on the Iur interface or the attempt to set up a CCH on the Iur interface fails. a CCH cannot be set up on the Iur interface or the attempt to set up a CCH on the Iur interface fails.3. 10.331 "Radio Resource Control (RRC)" 3GPP TS25.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Relocation with Cell/URA Update This describes the signaling procedure of a successful relocation with cell/URA update. refer to the elementary procedures. 10. 10-13 . refer to the elementary procedures.. 10.5 Elementary Procedures of Relocation with Cell/URA Update This describes the elementary procedures of relocation with cell/URA update in terms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions. Ltd.3.2 Triggering Conditions of Relocation with Cell/URA Update When the UE performs cell reselection to a cell in another RNC. 10.3. For the messages related to relocation failures. For the messages related to relocation failures. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3.423 "UTRAN Iur interface RNSAP signalling" 10.413 "UTRAN Iu interface RANAP signalling" 3GPP TS25.3.

After a successful URA update. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. This response from the UE is optional. the DRNC sends a CELL UPDATE CONFIRM message to the UE. the UE sends a URA UPDATE message to the DRNC. the UE can send a PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION COMPLETE message (for the cell update) or a UTRAN MOBILITY INFORMATION CONFIRM message (for the URA update) to the DRNC. To initiate a cell update. Ltd. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) l l l 10-14 .. the DRNC sends a URA UPDATE CONFIRM message to the UE. After a successful cell update. the UE sends a CELL UPDATE message to the DRNC. After receiving the CELL UPDATE CONFIRM or URA UPDATE CONFIRM message from the DRNC. To initiate a URA update.10 SRNS Relocation Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Figure 10-13 Signaling procedure of a successful relocation with cell/URA update Note the following information about the procedure shown in Figure 10-13: l The DRNC acquires the SRNC ID of the UE from the URNTI IE in the CELL UPDATE message and then sends an UPLINK SIGNALLING TRANSFER INDICATION message to the SRNC to indicate that the UE requests a cell update.

Context Table 10-3 and Table 10-4 list the messages to be traced. Ltd.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide l 10 SRNS Relocation Procedure If the DRNC does not obtain the information about the UE capability..3.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Relocation with Cell/URA Update The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure of a relocation with cell/URA update. Table 10-3 Messages to be traced on the SRNC Interface and Protocol to Be Traced Message Name on the LMT Message Name in Protocols Iur RNSAP_UL_SIG_TRANSF_IN D RNSAP_RELOC_COMMIT RANAP_RELOCATION_REQ UIRED RANAP_RELOCATION_COM MAND UPLINK SIGNALLING TRANSFER INDICATION RELOCATION COMMIT RELOCATION REQUIRED RELOCATION COMMAND RELOCATION PREPARATION FAILURE IU RELEASE COMMAND IU RELEASE COMPLETE Iu RANAP_RELOCATION_PREP ARATION_FAILURE RANAP_IU_RELEASE_COM MAND RANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMP LETE Table 10-4 Messages to be traced on the DRNC Interface and Protocol to Be Traced Uu Message Name on the LMT RRC_CELL_UPDATE RRC_URA_UPDATE Message Name in Protocols CELL UPDATE URA UPDATE 10-15 Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. . 10. You are logged in to the RNC as a user authorized to perform tracing management. the DRNC initiates a UE capability enquiry procedure. Prerequisite l l The RNC LMT works properly.

Ltd. Figure 10-14 shows an example of Uu signaling tracing for the relocation with cell update. Figure 10-14 Example of Uu signaling tracing for the relocation with cell update 10-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) ..10 SRNS Relocation Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Interface and Protocol to Be Traced Message Name on the LMT RRC_CELL_UPDATE_CON FIRM RRC_URA_UPDATE_CONF IRM RRC_PH_CH_RECFG_CMP RRC_UTRAN_MOBIL_INF O_CONFIRM RRC_UE_CAP_ENQUIRY RRC_UE_CAP_INFO RRC_UE_CAP_INFO_CONF IRM RNSAP_UL_SIG_TRANSF_I ND RNSAP_RELOC_COMMIT RANAP_RELOCATION_RE Q RANAP_RELOCATION_RE Q_ACK Message Name in Protocols CELL UPDATE CONFIRM URA UPDATE CONFIRM PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION COMPLETE UTRAN MOBILITY INFORMATION CONFIRM UE CAPABILITY ENQUIRY UE CAPABILITY INFORMATION UE CAPABILITY INFORMATION CONFIRM UPLINK SIGNALLING TRANSFER INDICATION RELOCATION COMMIT RELOCATION REQUEST RELOCATION REQUEST ACKNOWLEDGE RELOCATION FAILURE RELOCATION DETECT RELOCATION COMPLETE Iur Iu RANAP_RELOCATION_FAI LURE RANAP_RELOCATION_DE TECT RANAP_RELOCATION_CO MPLETE Procedure Step 1 Create a Uu tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.

10.3.5.5 Elementary Procedures of Relocation with Cell/URA Update This describes the elementary procedures of relocation with cell/URA update in terms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions. Figure 10-18 Example of Iu signaling tracing on the DRNC ----End 10.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 10 SRNS Relocation Procedure Step 2 Create an Iur tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task. Ltd.1 Relocation Preparation Procedure The relocation preparation procedure is performed to prepare resources for relocation of the SRNS. Figure 10-15 Example of Iur signaling tracing on the SRNC Figure 10-16 shows an example of Iur signaling tracing on the DRNC.. Figure 10-15 shows an example of Iur signaling tracing on the SRNC.3.5. Figure 10-17 Example of Iu signaling tracing on the SRNC Figure 10-18 shows an example of Iu signaling tracing on the DRNC. Figure 10-17 shows an example of Iu signaling tracing on the SRNC. 10. Figure 10-16 Example of Iur signaling tracing on the DRNC Step 3 Create an Iu tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.3. 10-17 .2 Relocation Resource Allocation Procedure Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

the cell update procedure takes the role of monitoring the RRC connection.3. switching the status of the RRC connection. Procedure Figure 10-19 shows the relocation preparation procedure.5. 10.5 Relocation Commit Procedure (Static Relocation or Relocation with Cell/URA Update) The relocation commit procedure is performed to execute the change of control from the SRNC of a UE to the DRNC. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) .10 SRNS Relocation Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide The relocation resource allocation procedure is performed to allocate resources from the target RNS for an SRNS relocation. 10.3 Cell Update Procedure The cell update procedure is performed to update the UE-related information on the UTRAN side when the location of a UE changes. Ltd.5.3. 10..4 URA Update Procedure The URA update procedure is performed to update the URA-related location information on the network side when the location of a UE changes. Relocation Preparation Procedure The relocation preparation procedure is performed to prepare resources for relocation of the SRNS.3.6 UE Capability Enquiry Procedure The UE capability enquiry procedure is performed to request a UE to transmit its capability information related to any radio access network so that the network can perform data configuration based on the UE capability.7 Iu Release Procedure The Iu release procedure is performed for the CN to release an Iu connection and all the UTRAN resources related only to that Iu connection.5. and transferring information. Triggering Conditions The relocation preparation procedure can be triggered in either of the following conditions: l l During an SRNS relocation. 10-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.5.3. the SRNC sends a RELOCATION REQUIRED message. 10.5. In addition. During an inter-RAT CS handover from WCDMA to GSM.3. reporting errors. 10. the SRNC sends a RELOCATION REQUIRED message.

If the resources partially or totally fail to be allocated. the CN applies for resources from the target RNC. The SRNC sends a RELOCATION REQUIRED message to the CN. During an inter-RAT CS handover from GSM to WCDMA. target PLMN. source SAC. source PLMN. source LAC.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 10 SRNS Relocation Procedure Figure 10-19 Relocation preparation procedure The procedure shown in Figure 10-19 is described as follows: 1. The message contains certain information such as relocation type. 3. The CN interacts with the target RNC or the target network system. and target LAC. The message contains the L3 information IE. the CN sends a RELOCATION COMMAND message when the preparation is complete. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. to prepare relevant resources. relocation cause. The CN sends a response message to the SRNC.. l Relocation Resource Allocation Procedure The relocation resource allocation procedure is performed to allocate resources from the target RNS for an SRNS relocation. l 2. the CN applies for resources from the target RNC. Triggering Conditions The relocation resource allocation procedure can be triggered in either of the following conditions: l l During an SRNS relocation. which carries the information about the relevant resources allocated by the target RNC or the target network system. such as the GSM system. Ltd. the CN sends a RELOCATION PREPARATION FAILURE message. 10-19 Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . If the target RNC or the target network system prepares the relevant resources successfully.

10 SRNS Relocation Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Procedure Figure 10-20 shows the relocation resource allocation procedure. The target RNC sends a response message to the CN. If the resources are allocated. 10-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 3. If the resources partially or totally fail to be allocated or the target RNC rejects the SRNS relocation for some reason.. integrity protection. In addition. encryption. Figure 10-20 Relocation resource allocation procedure The procedure shown in Figure 10-20 is described as follows: 1. the target RNC sends a RELOCATION REQUEST ACKNOWLEDGE message. such as the IMSI of the UE. the cell update procedure takes the role of monitoring the RRC connection. The message contains the radio resources and other parameters allocated to the UE. transport layer and physical layer information. Ltd. switching the status of the RRC connection. and RAB parameters. The message contains certain information. and transferring information. indicating the failure cause. The CN sends a RELOCATION REQUEST message to the target RNC. The target RNC allocates radio resources for the relocation. l Cell Update Procedure The cell update procedure is performed to update the UE-related information on the UTRAN side when the location of a UE changes. RAB. Iu signaling connection ID. target cell identifier. reporting errors. CN domain indicator. the target RNC sends a RELOCATION FAILURE message. The parameters include the UTRAN Radio Network Temporary Identifier (U-RNTI). chosen encryption algorithm. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . l 2. and chosen integrity protection algorithm. handover cause.

Figure 10-21 Cell update procedure The procedure shown in Figure 10-21 is described as follows: 1. Ltd. The RNC sends a CELL UPDATE CONFIRM message to the UE. The message contains the information such as the Serving RNC Radio Network Temporary Identifier (S-RNTI) and the SRNC ID. The message contains the information such as the U-RNTI and the IEs about the transport channels.. The UE sends a CELL UPDATE message to the RNC. If the UE responds. physical channels. According to related IEs in the received message. the UE may respond with messages or not. 3. the message can be one of the following messages: l l 2. and radio bearers.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 10 SRNS Relocation Procedure Triggering Conditions The cell update procedure can be triggered in one of the following conditions: l l l l l l l Cell reselection Re-entering the service area Periodical cell update Radio link failure Paging response Uplink data transmission RLC unrecoverable error Procedure Figure 10-21 shows the cell update procedure. 10-21 Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . UTRAN MOBILITY INFORMATION CONFIRM PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION COMPLETE Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

2. 3. If there is a response. Triggering Conditions The URA update procedure can be triggered in either of the following conditions: l l URA reselection Periodical URA update Procedure Figure 10-22 shows the URA update procedure. The message contains the cause for the URA update and the IEs such as the U-RNTI. Figure 10-22 URA update procedure The procedure shown in Figure 10-22 is described as follows: 1.10 SRNS Relocation Procedure l l l RAN Signalling Analysis Guide TRANSPORT CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION COMPLETE RADIO BEARER RECONFIGURATION COMPLETE RADIO BEARER RELEASE COMPLETE URA Update Procedure The URA update procedure is performed to update the URA-related location information on the network side when the location of a UE changes. The UE responds optionally. the UE sends a UTRAN MOBILITY INFORMATION CONFIRM message to the RNC after taking the new parameters into effect.. 10-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . The UE sends a URA UPDATE message to the RNC to initiate the URA update. The RNC sends a URA UPDATE CONFIRM message to the UE. The message contains the new C-RNTI and U-RNTI or the information about the new ciphering and integrity protection modes. Ltd.

If an RAB supporting lossless SRNS relocation is available on the Iu-PS interface. Procedure Figure 10-23 shows the relocation commit procedure for the static relocation or relocation with cell/URA update.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 10 SRNS Relocation Procedure Relocation Commit Procedure (Static Relocation or Relocation with Cell/URA Update) The relocation commit procedure is performed to execute the change of control from the SRNC of a UE to the DRNC. The original DRNC sends a RELOCATION COMPLETE message to the CN to notify that the relocation is successful. 2. Figure 10-23 Relocation commit procedure (static relocation or relocation with cell/URA update) The procedure shown in Figure 10-23 is described as follows: 1. Triggering Conditions The CN sends a RELOCATION COMMAND message to the SRNC. 10-23 . Ltd. The SRNC sends a RELOCATION COMMIT message to the DRNC. The DRNC sends a RELOCATION DETECT message to the CN to notify the CN of the detection of the relocation commitment. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. UE Capability Enquiry Procedure The UE capability enquiry procedure is performed to request a UE to transmit its capability information related to any radio access network so that the network can perform data configuration based on the UE capability. Then. the RELOCATION COMMIT message carries the GTP-U and PDCP sequence numbers required for data forwarding. 3. the SRNC initiates data forwarding..

The message contains the information about UE capabilities. 2. Figure 10-24 UE capability enquiry procedure The procedure shown in Figure 10-24 is described as follows: 1. The SRNC sends a UE CAPABILITY ENQUIRY message to the UE through the downlink DCCH using AM RLC. Iu Release Procedure The Iu release procedure is performed for the CN to release an Iu connection and all the UTRAN resources related only to that Iu connection. 3. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. The SRNC reads the UE capability information and then sends a UE CAPABILITY INFORMA CONFIRM message to the UE through the downlink DCCH using AM or UM RLC. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) l 10-24 . The UE sends a UE CAPABILITY INFORMATION message to the SRNC through the uplink DCCH using AM or UM RLC.10 SRNS Relocation Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Triggering Conditions The UTRAN sends a UE CAPABILITY ENQUIRY message to acquire the UE capability information related to any radio access network. sending an IU RELEASE REQUEST message. for example.. The Serving Radio Network Subsystem (SRNS) is relocated. Procedure Figure 10-24 shows the UE capability enquiry procedure. Triggering Conditions The Iu release procedure can be triggered in one of the following conditions: l l The transaction between the UE and the CN is complete. The UTRAN requests the CN to release the resources on the Iu interface by.

10. 10.1 Protocols Related to Relocation with Hard Handover The procedure of relocation with hard handover complies with some 3GPP TS25 protocols. refer to the elementary procedures. The CN sends an IU RELEASE COMMAND message to the SRNC to initiate the Iu release procedure. Figure 10-25 Iu release procedure The procedure shown in Figure 10-25 is described as follows: 1. NOTE After sending the IU RELEASE COMMAND message. the CN will not send further RANAP connection-oriented messages on this particular connection.4.2 Triggering Conditions of Relocation with Hard Handover The UE in CELL_DCH state performs an inter-RNC hard handover. Procedure Figure 10-25 shows the Iu release procedure. The SRNC releases the related UTRAN resources and then sends an IU RELEASE COMPLETE message to the CN.4. 10-25 . Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.4 Relocation with Hard Handover The procedure of relocation with hard handover is performed to change control from the SRNC of a UE to the DRNC. 2. The relocation is triggered when the UE performs an inter-RNC hard handover.3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Relocation with Hard Handover This describes the signaling procedure of a successful relocation with hard handover. Ltd.4. which can be either an intra-frequency hard handover or an inter-frequency handover.. The message indicates the cause for the release of the signaling connection. which can be either an intra-frequency hard handover or an inter-frequency handover. No Iur interface exists between the two RNCs involved in the relocation. 10.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide l 10 SRNS Relocation Procedure The SRNS relocation is canceled after a relocation resource allocation procedure is complete. For the messages related to relocation failures. 10.

3 Signaling Procedure of a Successful Relocation with Hard Handover This describes the signaling procedure of a successful relocation with hard handover. Figure 10-26 shows the signaling procedure of a successful relocation with hard handover.5 Elementary Procedures of Relocation with Hard Handover This describes the elementary procedures of relocation with hard handover in terms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions. 10.4.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Relocation with Hard Handover The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure of a relocation with hard handover.1 Protocols Related to Relocation with Hard Handover The procedure of relocation with hard handover complies with some 3GPP TS25 protocols. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . 10.4. 10. which can be either an intra-frequency hard handover or an inter-frequency handover. the SRNC performs a relocation with hard handover. 10-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. For the messages related to relocation failures..4. Ltd.4. In such a condition.10 SRNS Relocation Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 10. refer to the elementary procedures.413 "UTRAN Iu interface RANAP signalling" 10.4.2 Triggering Conditions of Relocation with Hard Handover The UE in CELL_DCH state performs an inter-RNC hard handover. The compliance protocols are as follows: l l 3GPP TS25.331 "Radio Resource Control (RRC)" 3GPP TS25. if no Iur interface exists between the two RNCs.

the DRNC initiates a UE capability enquiry procedure. l l 10.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Relocation with Hard Handover The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure of a relocation with hard handover. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. the DRNC sends a RELOCATION DETECT message to the CN.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 10 SRNS Relocation Procedure Figure 10-26 Signaling procedure of a successful relocation with hard handover Note the following information about the procedure shown in Figure 10-26: l During the relocation with hard handover. After receiving a RADIO LINK RESTORE INDICATION message from the NodeB. If the DRNC does not obtain the information about the UE capability. The sequence numbers are required for data forwarding.. 10-27 . if an RAB supporting lossless SRNS relocation is available on the Iu-PS interface. the SRNC sends the GTP-U and PDCP sequence numbers to the DRNC through the FORWARD SRNS CONTEXT message.4.

. Table 10-5 Messages to be traced on the SRNC Interface and Protocol to Be Traced Message Name on the LMT Message Name in Protocols PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION FAILURE RELOCATION REQUIRED RELOCATION COMMAND RELOCATION PREPARATION FAILURE FORWARD SRNS CONTEXT IU RELEASE COMMAND IU RELEASE COMPLETE RRC_PH_CH_RECFG Uu RRC_PH_CH_RECFG_FAIL RANAP_RELOCATION_REQU IRED RANAP_RELOCATION_COM MAND RANAP_RELOCATION_PREP ARATION_FAILURE RANAP_FORWARD_SRNS_C ONTEXT RANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMM AND RANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMP LETE Table 10-6 Messages to be traced on the DRNC Interface and Protocol to Be Traced Message Name on the LMT Iu Message Name in Protocols PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION COMPLETE UE CAPABILITY ENQUIRY UE CAPABILITY INFORMATION UE CAPABILITY INFORMATION CONFIRM RRC_PH_CH_RECFG_CMP RRC_UE_CAP_ENQUIRY RRC_UE_CAP_INFO RRC_UE_CAP_INFO_CONF IRM Uu 10-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) .10 SRNS Relocation Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Prerequisite l l The RNC LMT works properly. You are logged in to the RNC as a user authorized to perform tracing management. Context Table 10-5 and Table 10-6 list the messages to be traced. Ltd.

RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 10 SRNS Relocation Procedure Interface and Protocol to Be Traced Message Name on the LMT RANAP_RELOCATION_RE Q RANAP_RELOCATION_RE Q_ACK RANAP_RELOCATION_FAI LURE RANAP_FORWARD_SRNS_ CONTEXT RANAP_RELOCATION_DE TECT RANAP_RELOCATION_CO MPLETE Message Name in Protocols RELOCATION REQUEST RELOCATION REQUEST ACKNOWLEDGE RELOCATION FAILURE FORWARD SRNS CONTEXT RELOCATION DETECT RELOCATION COMPLETE Iu Procedure Step 1 Create a Uu tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Figure 10-28 Example of Uu signaling tracing on the DRNC Step 2 Create an Iu tracing task by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task. 10-29 . Figure 10-29 shows an example of Iu signaling tracing on the SRNC. Ltd. Figure 10-29 Example of Iu signaling tracing on the SRNC Figure 10-30 shows an example of Iu signaling tracing on the DRNC. Figure 10-27 shows an example of Uu signaling tracing on the SRNC.. Figure 10-27 Example of Uu signaling tracing on the SRNC Figure 10-28 shows an example of Uu signaling tracing on the DRNC.

10 SRNS Relocation Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Figure 10-30 Example of Iu signaling tracing on the DRNC ----End 10.5.4 Physical Channel Reconfiguration Procedure The physical channel reconfiguration procedure is performed to set up. Triggering Conditions The relocation preparation procedure can be triggered in either of the following conditions: l l During an SRNS relocation.5 UE Capability Enquiry Procedure The UE capability enquiry procedure is performed to request a UE to transmit its capability information related to any radio access network so that the network can perform data configuration based on the UE capability. or release a physical channel.4. the SRNC sends a RELOCATION REQUIRED message. 10..4.5. Procedure Figure 10-31 shows the relocation preparation procedure. the SRNC sends a RELOCATION REQUIRED message.1 Relocation Preparation Procedure The relocation preparation procedure is performed to prepare resources for relocation of the SRNS.4.4.5. Relocation Preparation Procedure The relocation preparation procedure is performed to prepare resources for relocation of the SRNS. 10.4.4. Ltd.3 Relocation Commit Procedure (Relocation with Hard Handover) The relocation commit procedure is performed to execute the change of control from the SRNC of a UE to the DRNC. 10. 10.5 Elementary Procedures of Relocation with Hard Handover This describes the elementary procedures of relocation with hard handover in terms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions. 10. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . During an inter-RAT CS handover from WCDMA to GSM. 10-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.6 Iu Release Procedure The Iu release procedure is performed for the CN to release an Iu connection and all the UTRAN resources related only to that Iu connection. 10.5.2 Relocation Resource Allocation Procedure The relocation resource allocation procedure is performed to allocate resources from the target RNS for an SRNS relocation.4. reconfigure.5.5.

relocation cause. the CN sends a RELOCATION PREPARATION FAILURE message. The message contains certain information such as relocation type. The SRNC sends a RELOCATION REQUIRED message to the CN. l Relocation Resource Allocation Procedure The relocation resource allocation procedure is performed to allocate resources from the target RNS for an SRNS relocation. If the resources partially or totally fail to be allocated. l 2.. 10-31 Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . target PLMN. source SAC. 3. source LAC. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the CN sends a RELOCATION COMMAND message when the preparation is complete. Triggering Conditions The relocation resource allocation procedure can be triggered in either of the following conditions: l l During an SRNS relocation. source PLMN. The CN sends a response message to the SRNC. The CN interacts with the target RNC or the target network system. and target LAC. to prepare relevant resources.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 10 SRNS Relocation Procedure Figure 10-31 Relocation preparation procedure The procedure shown in Figure 10-31 is described as follows: 1. which carries the information about the relevant resources allocated by the target RNC or the target network system. the CN applies for resources from the target RNC. such as the GSM system. Ltd. If the target RNC or the target network system prepares the relevant resources successfully. During an inter-RAT CS handover from GSM to WCDMA. the CN applies for resources from the target RNC. The message contains the L3 information IE.

If the resources partially or totally fail to be allocated or the target RNC rejects the SRNS relocation for some reason. The target RNC allocates radio resources for the relocation. target cell identifier. Ltd. The message contains certain information. Triggering Conditions The CN sends a RELOCATION COMMAND message to the SRNC. indicating the failure cause. integrity protection. chosen encryption algorithm. The target RNC sends a response message to the CN.. The CN sends a RELOCATION REQUEST message to the target RNC. The message contains the radio resources and other parameters allocated to the UE. Iu signaling connection ID. the target RNC sends a RELOCATION FAILURE message. such as the IMSI of the UE. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . If the resources are allocated. 10-32 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l Relocation Commit Procedure (Relocation with Hard Handover) The relocation commit procedure is performed to execute the change of control from the SRNC of a UE to the DRNC.10 SRNS Relocation Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Procedure Figure 10-32 shows the relocation resource allocation procedure. and RAB parameters. CN domain indicator. the target RNC sends a RELOCATION REQUEST ACKNOWLEDGE message. 3. transport layer and physical layer information. handover cause. l 2. and chosen integrity protection algorithm. encryption. Figure 10-32 Relocation resource allocation procedure The procedure shown in Figure 10-32 is described as follows: 1. RAB. The parameters include the UTRAN Radio Network Temporary Identifier (U-RNTI).

3. The sequence numbers are required for data forwarding. Figure 10-33 Relocation commit procedure (relocation with hard handover) The procedure shown in Figure 10-33 is described as follows: 1.. The original DRNC sends a RELOCATION COMPLETE message to the CN to notify that the relocation is successful. reconfigure. Triggering Conditions The SRNC sends a PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION message. When an RAB supporting lossless SRNS relocation is available on the Iu-PS interface. Ltd. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 4. After receiving the FORWARD SRNS CONTEXT message. 2. 10-33 .RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 10 SRNS Relocation Procedure Procedure Figure 10-33 shows the relocation commit procedure for the relocation with hard handover. the DRNC sends a RELOCATION DETECT message to the CN. Physical Channel Reconfiguration Procedure The physical channel reconfiguration procedure is performed to set up. Procedure Figure 10-34 shows the physical channel reconfiguration procedure. After receiving a RADIO LINK RESTORE INDICATION message from the NodeB. or release a physical channel. the SGSN forwards the message to the DRNC. The UE is handed over from the SRNC to the DRNC through a physical channel reconfiguration procedure. the SRNC sends a FORWARD SRNS CONTEXT message to the SGSN to ask the SGSN to transfer the GTP-U and PDCP sequence numbers to the DRNC.

the UE restores the configuration to the old physical channel configuration and sends a PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION FAILURE message on the DCCH by using AM RLC. The UE sends a response message to the SRNC.10 SRNS Relocation Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Figure 10-34 Physical channel reconfiguration procedure The procedure shown in Figure 10-34 is described as follows: 1. l If successfully reconfiguring the physical channels specified by the PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION message. 3. transport channel. Radio Bearer (RB). Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . 2. The value of the Failure cause IE contained in the PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION FAILURE message is "physical channel failure". and physical channel. the UE sends a PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION COMPLETE message on the uplink DCCH by using AM RLC. Ltd. 10-34 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If failing to reconfigure the physical channels specified by the PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION message. l UE Capability Enquiry Procedure The UE capability enquiry procedure is performed to request a UE to transmit its capability information related to any radio access network so that the network can perform data configuration based on the UE capability. The SRNC sends a PHYSICAL CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION message to the UE to request reconfiguration of a physical channel.. Triggering Conditions The UTRAN sends a UE CAPABILITY ENQUIRY message to acquire the UE capability information related to any radio access network. Procedure Figure 10-35 shows the UE capability enquiry procedure. The UE saves the IEs of the UE.

The SRNC reads the UE capability information and then sends a UE CAPABILITY INFORMA CONFIRM message to the UE through the downlink DCCH using AM or UM RLC. The UTRAN requests the CN to release the resources on the Iu interface by. 2. Iu Release Procedure The Iu release procedure is performed for the CN to release an Iu connection and all the UTRAN resources related only to that Iu connection. The SRNS relocation is canceled after a relocation resource allocation procedure is complete. The Serving Radio Network Subsystem (SRNS) is relocated. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The SRNC sends a UE CAPABILITY ENQUIRY message to the UE through the downlink DCCH using AM RLC. 10-35 . l l Procedure Figure 10-36 shows the Iu release procedure.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 10 SRNS Relocation Procedure Figure 10-35 UE capability enquiry procedure The procedure shown in Figure 10-35 is described as follows: 1.. Ltd. sending an IU RELEASE REQUEST message. The message contains the information about UE capabilities. for example. 3. The UE sends a UE CAPABILITY INFORMATION message to the SRNC through the uplink DCCH using AM or UM RLC. Triggering Conditions The Iu release procedure can be triggered in one of the following conditions: l l The transaction between the UE and the CN is complete.

The SRNC releases the related UTRAN resources and then sends an IU RELEASE COMPLETE message to the CN.2 Cause of Triggering the DSCR Procedure When the Iur connection is missing. the directed signaling connection re-establishment (DSCR) procedure is triggered. and the RNC sends the "RRC CONNECTION RELEASE" message. The message indicates the cause for the release of the signaling connection.5. 2. Ltd. the DSCR procedure is triggered. 10.331 "Radio Resource Control (RRC)" 3GPP TS23.1 Protocols Related to the DSCR Procedure The DSCR procedure complies with the following 3GPP TS25 protocols: l l 3GPP TS25.5.3 Successful DSCR Procedure This describes a successful DSCR procedure. 10.1 Protocols Related to the DSCR Procedure The DSCR procedure complies with the following 3GPP TS25 protocols: 10. As a result. As a result. The CN sends an IU RELEASE COMMAND message to the SRNC to initiate the Iu release procedure.5 DSCR Procedure When the Iur connection is missing. the RNC cannot contact the SRNC to verify the UE. and the RNC sends the "RRC CONNECTION RELEASE" message.5.5. 10. NOTE After sending the IU RELEASE COMMAND message. the CN will not send further RANAP connection-oriented messages on this particular connection.10 SRNS Relocation Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Figure 10-36 Iu release procedure The procedure shown in Figure 10-36 is described as follows: 1. the RNC cannot contact the SRNC to verify the UE. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) 10-36 .. 10.060 "General Packet Radio Service (GPRS)" Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

the RNC1 is the source RNC and the RNC2 is the destination RNC. 10. During the relocation.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 10 SRNS Relocation Procedure 10. the directed signaling connection re-establishment (DSCR) procedure is triggered. The RNC1 sends the "DOWNLINK SIGNALLING TRANSFER REQUEST" message to the RNC2. As a result. The RNC1 initiates a DSCR procedure. and the RNC sends the "RRC CONNECTION RELEASE" message. Figure 10-37 shows a successful DSCR procedure.3 Successful DSCR Procedure This describes a successful DSCR procedure. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 2.2 Cause of Triggering the DSCR Procedure When the Iur connection is missing.5. Figure 10-37 Successful DSCR procedure The UE sets up the RRC connection to the RNC1 (namely. Ltd. The procedure is as follows: 1. 10-37 Issue 01 (2009-03-25) .. the RNC cannot contact the SRNC to verify the UE. requesting the RNC2 to send the "RRC CONNECTION RELEASE" message to the UE.5. SRNC).

The RNC2 sends the UE the "RRC CONNECTION RELEASE" message. 9. the UE reestablishes the RRC connection and RAB connection immediately. After the UE finds a suitable cell. The UE sends the RNC2 the "ROUTE AREA UPDATE" message to initiate the URA update. The UE sends the SGSN the "DIRECT TRANSFER" message to request the service setup. the UE releases the current RAB connection and RRC connection and then enters the idle mode.. which contains "DSCR". the RNC1 transmits data packets (except those unacknowledged by the RNC1) to the SGSN. Then. 8. 6. The SGSN initiates the RAB establishment procedure. 4.10 SRNS Relocation Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 3." After receiving the message. The UE performs a cell reselection procedure to find a suitable cell. Ltd. namely. 5. 7. 10-38 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 10. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . the cause of the "RRC CONNECTION RELEASE" message. The SGSN requests the RNC1 to transmit data packets.

11. 11. OTDOA.3 Positioning Based on OTDOA-IPDL When the OTDOA-IPDL positioning method is adopted. This topic also describes the elementary procedures in terms of functions. triggering conditions. They are CELLID +RTT. and signaling in normal and abnormal conditions. triggering conditions. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 11-1 ..4 Positioning Based on A-GPS When the A-GPS positioning method is adopted. 11. which measures the differences.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 11 Location Service Procedure 11 About This Chapter Location Service Procedure The location service procedure is performed to identify the geographic location of a UE. protocols. 11. This topic describes the location services in terms of positioning methods. the location of a UE is identified based on the GPS positioning-assistance data and GPS pseudo-range measurement results collected by the RNC. signaling procedure of successful positioning. the location of a UE is identified based on the arrival time differences of CPICH signals from three inter-NodeB cells to the UE. and A-GPS. the location of a UE is identified based on the coverage area of the reference cell and the RTT measurements performed on all the cells in the active set of the UE.1 Positioning Methods Three standard positioning methods are available in a WCDMA system. Ltd. and signaling tracing on the RNC LMT.2 Positioning Based on CELLID+RTT When the CELLID+RTT positioning method is adopted.

11. OTDOA. Exceptions. For example.5 Elementary Procedures of Positioning Based on CELLID+RTT This describes the elementary procedures of positioning based on CELLID+RTT in terms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions.3 Signaling Procedure of Successful Positioning Based on CELLID+RTT This describes the signaling procedure of successful positioning based on CELLID+RTT. in terms of the horizontal accuracy.2. 11.1 Positioning Methods Three standard positioning methods are available in a WCDMA system.1 Protocols Related to Positioning Based on CELLID+RTT The procedure of positioning based on CELLID+RTT complies with some 3GPP TS22.305 "User Equipment (UE) positioning in Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (UTRAN)" 3GPP TS25.11 Location Service Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 11. 11.2. For the messages related to positioning failures. TS23. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) l 11-2 . refer to the elementary procedures. TS23. 11.2.2.2 Triggering Conditions of Positioning Based on CELLID+RTT The CN initiates a positioning request and the RNC chooses the UE-assisted CELLID+RTT positioning method. Ltd. Observed Time Difference Of Arrival (OTDOA) second and CELLID+RTT third. however.331 "Radio Resource Control (RRC)" Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. In that case. They are CELLID +RTT. Network Assisted GPS (A-GPS) ranks first. 11. the A-GPS positioning method may fail or perform with poor accuracy. the CELLID+RTT positioning method may provide higher accuracy.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Positioning Based on CELLID+RTT or OTDOA-IPDL The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure of positioning based on CELLID+RTT or OTDOA-IPDL.071 "Location Services (LCS)" 3GPP TS23.. 11. and A-GPS. the location of a UE is identified based on the coverage area of the reference cell and the RTT measurements performed on all the cells in the active set of the UE. 11. Typically. The compliance protocols are as follows: l l l 3GPP TS22.1 Protocols Related to Positioning Based on CELLID+RTT The procedure of positioning based on CELLID+RTT complies with some 3GPP TS22.271 "Functional stage 2 description of LCS" 3GPP TS25.2.2 Positioning Based on CELLID+RTT When the CELLID+RTT positioning method is adopted.2. RTT is short for Round Trip Time. in places where obstacles exist in large number and not enough satellite signals are found. and TS25 protocols. may exist. and TS25 protocols.

the RNC chooses the UE-assisted CELLID +RTT positioning method based on the factors such as the QoS of positioning.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide l l 11 Location Service Procedure 3GPP TS25. 11-3 . For the messages related to positioning failures. The SRNC performs location calculation based on the RTT measurement results and the known location of each cell and then reports the positioning results to the CN through a LOCATION REPORT message. After receiving the positioning request from the CN. and the SRNC chooses the UE-assisted CELLID+RTT positioning method.2. l 11. Figure 11-1 shows the signaling procedure of successful positioning based on CELLID+RTT. the positioning method configured on the RNC side. Ltd.2.3 Signaling Procedure of Successful Positioning Based on CELLID+RTT This describes the signaling procedure of successful positioning based on CELLID+RTT.433 "UTRAN Iub interface Node B Application Part (NBAP) signaling" 11. refer to the elementary procedures. and the positioning capability of the UE.413 "UTRAN Iu interface RANAP signalling" 3GPP TS25.2. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Positioning Based on CELLID+RTT or OTDOA-IPDL The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure of positioning based on CELLID+RTT or OTDOA-IPDL. Figure 11-1 Signaling procedure of successful positioning based on CELLID+RTT Note the following information about the procedure shown in Figure 11-1: l The CN sends an authenticated LOCATION REPORTING CONTROL message to the SRNC. 11..2 Triggering Conditions of Positioning Based on CELLID+RTT The CN initiates a positioning request and the RNC chooses the UE-assisted CELLID+RTT positioning method.

. You are logged in to the RNC as a user authorized to perform tracing management.11 Location Service Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Prerequisite l l The RNC LMT works properly. Figure 11-2 shows an example of CDT tracing on the positioning based on CELLID+RTT. Figure 11-2 Example of CDT tracing result ----End 11-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . Table 11-1 Messages to be traced Interface and Protocol to Be Traced Message Name on the LMT RRC_MEAS_CTRL Uu RRC_MEAS_RPRT RRC_MEAS_CTRL_FAIL NBAP_DECIC_MEAS_INIT_ REQ NBAP_DECIC_MEAS_INIT_ RSP RANAP_LOCATION_REPO RTING_CONTROL RANAP_LOCATION_REPO RT Message Name in Protocols MEASUREMENT CONTROL MEASUREMENT REPORT MEASUREMENT CONTROL FAILURE DEDICATED MEASUREMENT INITIALIZATION REQUEST DEDICATED MEASUREMENT INITIALIZATION REPONSE LOCATION REPORTING CONTROL LOCATION REPORT Iub Iu Procedure Create a Call Data Tracing (CDT) task for a UE in positioning by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task. Context Table 11-1 lists the messages to be traced.

RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 11 Location Service Procedure 11. 11-5 Issue 01 (2009-03-25) .2 RTT Measurement Procedure Dedicated for positioning..5 Elementary Procedures of Positioning Based on CELLID +RTT This describes the elementary procedures of positioning based on CELLID+RTT in terms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions. if the UE does not support the UE Rx-Tx type 2 measurement) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 11.5. Procedure Figure 11-3 shows the UE measurement procedure.2. Ltd.2. Triggering Conditions After receiving a LOCATION REPORTING CONTROL message from the CN.5. Figure 11-3 UE measurement procedure The procedure shown in Figure 11-3 is described as follows: 1. the RNC initiates the UE measurement procedure for the location service. the RTT measurement procedure is performed by the NodeB to measure the Round Trip Time (RTT) for one or more cells. The SRNC sends a MEASUREMENT CONTROL message to the UE to request the UE to perform measurements based on the positioning method: l CELLID+RTT positioning method: UE Rx-Tx type 2 measurement (or UE Rx-Tx type 1 measurement.2.1 UE Measurement Procedure The UE measurement procedure is performed for the RNC to request a report of attributes from the UE. 11. UE Measurement Procedure The UE measurement procedure is performed for the RNC to request a report of attributes from the UE.

l l RTT Measurement Procedure Dedicated for positioning. The CRNC sends a DEDICATED MEASUREMENT INITIALIZATION REQUEST message to the NodeB to request the NodeB to perform an RTT measurement. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. l 2. and UE Rx-Tx type 2 measurement in the reference cell (if the UE is in CELL_DCH state) A-GPS positioning method: GPS pseudo-range measurement and Doppler measurement If the measurements are successful. the UE sends a MEASUREMENT REPORT message to report the measurement results. the UE sends a MEASUREMENT CONTROL FAILURE message. The UE sends a response message to the SRNC. Procedure Figure 11-4 shows the RTT measurement procedure. The measurement object varies with the positioning method as follows: l l CELLID+RTT positioning method: cells in the active set OTDOA-IPDL positioning method: reference cell 2. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . Triggering Conditions After receiving a LOCATION REPORTING CONTROL message from the CN. Ltd. the RTT measurement procedure is performed by the NodeB to measure the Round Trip Time (RTT) for one or more cells. the RNC starts to perform an RTT measurement for the cells in the active set or for the reference cell. If the UE does not support the measurement requested by the SRNC or if the measurement results exceed the maximum number of criteria supported by the UE. 11-6 The NodeB sends a response message to the CRNC.11 Location Service Procedure l RAN Signalling Analysis Guide OTDOA-IPDL positioning method: OTDOA type 2 measurements between the reference cell and the neighboring cells. Figure 11-4 RTT measurement procedure The procedure shown in Figure 11-4 is described as follows: 1.

and TS25 protocols.071 "Location Services (LCS)" 3GPP TS23. 11-7 . the NodeB sends a DEDICATED MEASUREMENT INITIALIZATION FAILURE message to inform the CRNC of the failure.1 Protocols Related to Positioning Based on OTDOA-IPDL The procedure of positioning based on OTDOA-IPDL complies with some 3GPP TS22.2 Triggering Conditions of Positioning Based on OTDOA-IPDL The CN initiates a positioning request and the RNC chooses the UE-assisted OTDOA-IPDL positioning method.413 "UTRAN Iu interface RANAP signalling" 3GPP TS25.3 Signaling Procedure of Successful Positioning Based on OTDOA-IPDL This describes the signaling procedure of successful positioning based on OTDOA-IPDL.3 Positioning Based on OTDOA-IPDL When the OTDOA-IPDL positioning method is adopted. For the messages related to positioning failures.3. The compliance protocols are as follows: l l l 3GPP TS22.3. TS23. refer to the elementary procedures.331 "Radio Resource Control (RRC)" 3GPP TS25. If the measurement requested by the CRNC fails to be initialized. 11. 11.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide l 11 Location Service Procedure If the measurement is successful.3..3. 11.3.1 Protocols Related to Positioning Based on OTDOA-IPDL The procedure of positioning based on OTDOA-IPDL complies with some 3GPP TS22. 11. Ltd.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Positioning Based on CELLID+RTT or OTDOA-IPDL The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure of positioning based on CELLID+RTT or OTDOA-IPDL.3.271 "Functional stage 2 description of LCS" 3GPP TS25.5 Elementary Procedures of Positioning Based on OTDOA-IPDL This describes the elementary procedures of positioning based on OTDOA-IPDL in terms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions. the location of a UE is identified based on the arrival time differences of CPICH signals from three inter-NodeB cells to the UE. and TS25 protocols. the NodeB sends a DEDICATED MEASUREMENT INITIALIZATION REPONSE message to report the measurement results. 11. TS23.305 "User Equipment (UE) positioning in Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (UTRAN)" 3GPP TS25. which measures the differences. 11. l 11.433 "UTRAN Iub interface Node B Application Part (NBAP) signaling" l l l Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

and the SRNC chooses the UE-assisted OTDOA-IPDL positioning method.3 Signaling Procedure of Successful Positioning Based on OTDOA-IPDL This describes the signaling procedure of successful positioning based on OTDOA-IPDL. The SRNC performs location calculation based on the known location of each cell.. If the UE is in CELL_DCH state.3. 11. After receiving the positioning request from the CN. For the messages related to positioning failures. the positioning method configured on the RNC side. 11-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3. Ltd. Then. the RNC chooses the UE-assisted OTDOAIPDL positioning method based on the factors such as the QoS of positioning. the SRNC reports the positioning results to the CN through a LOCATION REPORT message. the results of the OTDOA measurement. Figure 11-5 shows the signaling procedure of successful positioning based on OTDOA-IPDL.3.11 Location Service Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 11. the SRNC performs the RTT measurement in the reference cell. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) . and the measurement results of the Relative Time Difference (RTD) between the reference cell and the neighboring cells.2 Triggering Conditions of Positioning Based on OTDOAIPDL The CN initiates a positioning request and the RNC chooses the UE-assisted OTDOA-IPDL positioning method. l l 11. and the positioning capability of the UE. Figure 11-5 Signaling procedure of successful positioning based on OTDOA-IPDL Note the following information about the procedure shown in Figure 11-5: l The CN sends an authenticated LOCATION REPORTING CONTROL message to the SRNC. refer to the elementary procedures.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Positioning Based on CELLID+RTT or OTDOA-IPDL The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure of positioning based on CELLID+RTT or OTDOA-IPDL.

You are logged in to the RNC as a user authorized to perform tracing management.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 11 Location Service Procedure Prerequisite l l The RNC LMT works properly. Ltd. 11-9 . Context Table 11-2 lists the messages to be traced. Figure 11-6 Example of CDT tracing result ----End Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Table 11-2 Messages to be traced Interface and Protocol to Be Traced Message Name on the LMT RRC_MEAS_CTRL Uu RRC_MEAS_RPRT RRC_MEAS_CTRL_FAIL NBAP_DECIC_MEAS_INIT_ REQ NBAP_DECIC_MEAS_INIT_ RSP RANAP_LOCATION_REPO RTING_CONTROL RANAP_LOCATION_REPO RT Message Name in Protocols MEASUREMENT CONTROL MEASUREMENT REPORT MEASUREMENT CONTROL FAILURE DEDICATED MEASUREMENT INITIALIZATION REQUEST DEDICATED MEASUREMENT INITIALIZATION REPONSE LOCATION REPORTING CONTROL LOCATION REPORT Iub Iu Procedure Create a Call Data Tracing (CDT) task for a UE in positioning by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task.. Figure 11-6 shows an example of CDT tracing on the positioning based on CELLID+RTT.

2 RTT Measurement Procedure Dedicated for positioning.1 UE Measurement Procedure The UE measurement procedure is performed for the RNC to request a report of attributes from the UE. 11. The SRNC sends a MEASUREMENT CONTROL message to the UE to request the UE to perform measurements based on the positioning method: l CELLID+RTT positioning method: UE Rx-Tx type 2 measurement (or UE Rx-Tx type 1 measurement. the RTT measurement procedure is performed by the NodeB to measure the Round Trip Time (RTT) for one or more cells.3. Triggering Conditions After receiving a LOCATION REPORTING CONTROL message from the CN. 11.3. Figure 11-7 UE measurement procedure The procedure shown in Figure 11-7 is described as follows: 1..11 Location Service Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 11. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) 11-10 .5 Elementary Procedures of Positioning Based on OTDOAIPDL This describes the elementary procedures of positioning based on OTDOA-IPDL in terms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions. the RNC initiates the UE measurement procedure for the location service. Ltd.5. Procedure Figure 11-7 shows the UE measurement procedure. UE Measurement Procedure The UE measurement procedure is performed for the RNC to request a report of attributes from the UE. if the UE does not support the UE Rx-Tx type 2 measurement) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3.5.

the RTT measurement procedure is performed by the NodeB to measure the Round Trip Time (RTT) for one or more cells. the UE sends a MEASUREMENT REPORT message to report the measurement results. the RNC starts to perform an RTT measurement for the cells in the active set or for the reference cell. the UE sends a MEASUREMENT CONTROL FAILURE message.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide l 11 Location Service Procedure OTDOA-IPDL positioning method: OTDOA type 2 measurements between the reference cell and the neighboring cells. l l RTT Measurement Procedure Dedicated for positioning. Triggering Conditions After receiving a LOCATION REPORTING CONTROL message from the CN. and UE Rx-Tx type 2 measurement in the reference cell (if the UE is in CELL_DCH state) A-GPS positioning method: GPS pseudo-range measurement and Doppler measurement If the measurements are successful. Figure 11-8 RTT measurement procedure The procedure shown in Figure 11-8 is described as follows: 1. l 2. If the UE does not support the measurement requested by the SRNC or if the measurement results exceed the maximum number of criteria supported by the UE. The UE sends a response message to the SRNC. 11-11 . Ltd. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The measurement object varies with the positioning method as follows: l l CELLID+RTT positioning method: cells in the active set OTDOA-IPDL positioning method: reference cell 2. The CRNC sends a DEDICATED MEASUREMENT INITIALIZATION REQUEST message to the NodeB to request the NodeB to perform an RTT measurement. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) The NodeB sends a response message to the CRNC.. Procedure Figure 11-8 shows the RTT measurement procedure.

and TS25 protocols. the RNC chooses the UE-assisted A-GPS positioning method based on the factors such as the QoS of positioning. 11.413 "UTRAN Iu interface RANAP signalling" l l 11.4.4.11 Location Service Procedure l RAN Signalling Analysis Guide If the measurement is successful. TS23. 11-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 11.5 Elementary Procedures of Positioning Based on A-GPS This describes the elementary procedures of positioning based on A-GPS in terms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions. refer to the elementary procedures. the NodeB sends a DEDICATED MEASUREMENT INITIALIZATION REPONSE message to report the measurement results.3 Signaling Procedure of Successful Positioning Based on A-GPS This describes the signaling procedure of successful positioning based on A-GPS. and TS25 protocols. The compliance protocols are as follows: l l l 3GPP TS22.4. l 11.2 Triggering Conditions of Positioning Based on A-GPS The CN initiates a positioning request and the RNC chooses the UE-assisted A-GPS positioning method.1 Protocols Related to Positioning Based on A-GPS The procedure of positioning based on A-GPS complies with some 3GPP TS22. the NodeB sends a DEDICATED MEASUREMENT INITIALIZATION FAILURE message to inform the CRNC of the failure. 11. After receiving the positioning request from the CN.1 Protocols Related to Positioning Based on A-GPS The procedure of positioning based on A-GPS complies with some 3GPP TS22. Ltd. the positioning method configured on the RNC side. 11. TS23.331 "Radio Resource Control (RRC)" 3GPP TS25. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) .4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Positioning Based on A-GPS The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure of positioning based on A-GPS.305 "User Equipment (UE) positioning in Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (UTRAN)" 3GPP TS25.4. If the measurement requested by the CRNC fails to be initialized.. For the messages related to positioning failures.4. 11.4.4 Positioning Based on A-GPS When the A-GPS positioning method is adopted. 11.4.071 "Location Services (LCS)" 3GPP TS23. the location of a UE is identified based on the GPS positioning-assistance data and GPS pseudo-range measurement results collected by the RNC.2 Triggering Conditions of Positioning Based on A-GPS The CN initiates a positioning request and the RNC chooses the UE-assisted A-GPS positioning method.271 "Functional stage 2 description of LCS" 3GPP TS25. and the positioning capability of the UE.

With the results of measurement based on AGPS. The SRNC calculates the 3-D location of each satellite that is involved in the positioning. Then. For the messages related to positioning failures. according to the GPS satellite ephemeris. Figure 11-9 Signaling procedure of successful positioning based on A-GPS Note the following information about the procedure shown in Figure 11-9: l The CN sends an authenticated LOCATION REPORTING CONTROL message to the SRNC. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the SRNC reports the positioning results to the CN through a LOCATION REPORT message. the SRNC performs location calculation.4 Using the RNC LMT to Trace the Procedure of Positioning Based on A-GPS The signaling tracing function of the RNC LMT can be used to trace the signaling procedure of positioning based on A-GPS. Ltd. refer to the elementary procedures..3 Signaling Procedure of Successful Positioning Based on AGPS This describes the signaling procedure of successful positioning based on A-GPS.4. Figure 11-9 shows the signaling procedure of successful positioning based on A-GPS.4. and the SRNC chooses the UE-assisted A-GPS positioning method. Context Table 11-3 lists the messages to be traced.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 11 Location Service Procedure 11. l 11. Prerequisite l l The RNC LMT works properly. 11-13 . You are logged in to the RNC as a user authorized to perform tracing management.

4. Issue 01 (2009-03-25) .1 UE Measurement Procedure The UE measurement procedure is performed for the RNC to request a report of attributes from the UE. Ltd. 11-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..5. UE Measurement Procedure The UE measurement procedure is performed for the RNC to request a report of attributes from the UE.11 Location Service Procedure RAN Signalling Analysis Guide Table 11-3 Messages to be traced Interface and Protocol to Be Traced Message Name on the LMT RRC_MEAS_CTRL Uu RRC_MEAS_RPRT RRC_MEAS_CTRL_FAIL RANAP_LOCATION_REPO RTING_CONTROL RANAP_LOCATION_REPO RT Message Name in Protocols MEASUREMENT CONTROL MEASUREMENT REPORT MEASUREMENT CONTROL FAILURE LOCATION REPORTING CONTROL LOCATION REPORT Iu Procedure Create a Call Data Tracing (CDT) task for a UE in positioning by referring to Creating an RNC Tracing Task. 11.5 Elementary Procedures of Positioning Based on A-GPS This describes the elementary procedures of positioning based on A-GPS in terms of triggering conditions and signaling procedures in normal and abnormal conditions.4. Triggering Conditions After receiving a LOCATION REPORTING CONTROL message from the CN. Figure 11-10 shows an example of CDT tracing result. the RNC initiates the UE measurement procedure for the location service. Figure 11-10 Example of CDT tracing result ----End 11.

and UE Rx-Tx type 2 measurement in the reference cell (if the UE is in CELL_DCH state) A-GPS positioning method: GPS pseudo-range measurement and Doppler measurement If the measurements are successful. Figure 11-11 UE measurement procedure The procedure shown in Figure 11-11 is described as follows: 1. if the UE does not support the UE Rx-Tx type 2 measurement) OTDOA-IPDL positioning method: OTDOA type 2 measurements between the reference cell and the neighboring cells. The UE sends a response message to the SRNC.. Ltd. 11-15 . l l 2. The SRNC sends a MEASUREMENT CONTROL message to the UE to request the UE to perform measurements based on the positioning method: l CELLID+RTT positioning method: UE Rx-Tx type 2 measurement (or UE Rx-Tx type 1 measurement. l l Issue 01 (2009-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the UE sends a MEASUREMENT CONTROL FAILURE message. If the UE does not support the measurement requested by the SRNC or if the measurement results exceed the maximum number of criteria supported by the UE. the UE sends a MEASUREMENT REPORT message to report the measurement results.RAN Signalling Analysis Guide 11 Location Service Procedure Procedure Figure 11-11 shows the UE measurement procedure.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful